Owner'S Manual: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing 2023
2023 RAM 2500/3500

what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
2023 RAM 2500/3500

extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go OWNER’S MANUAL
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
USA CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. SECOND EDITION V1
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit mopar.com/om (USA),
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a
that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Never drink and then drive.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................92 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 125 4
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 225 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 295 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................349 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................369 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................438
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................... 449
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................455
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS ................................................................................25 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —

Manual Door Locks......................................................25 IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 38
SYMBOLS KEY .....................................................................10 Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...............................26 MIRRORS ............................................................................ 38
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ........................................10 Power Side Steps — If Equipped ................................26 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................ 38
CONSUMER INFORMATION — Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Illuminated Vanity Mirror —
TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING ................................................10 Passive Entry (If Equipped) ........................................26 If Equipped................................................................... 40
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......................12 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped .........28 Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 41
SYMBOL GLOSSARY...........................................................12 Automatic Door Locks — Outside Automatic Dimming
If Equipped ...................................................................28 Mirror — If Equipped.................................................... 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Child-Protection Door Lock ........................................28 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................................... 42
KEYS ....................................................................................17 STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 29 Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 43
Key Fob ........................................................................ 17 Tilt Steering Column ....................................................29 Automatic Power Folding
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................20 Heated Steering Wheel — Mirrors — If Equipped.................................................. 43
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................20 If Equipped ..................................................................29 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 20 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — If Equipped................................................................... 44
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .................22 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................... 30 Power Convex Mirror Switch —
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 22 Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................30 If Equipped................................................................... 44
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 22 Basic Voice Commands...............................................30 Forward Utility Lights and Rear Guidance Lights —
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Get Started...................................................................30 If Equipped................................................................... 44
If Equipped .................................................................. 23 Additional Information.................................................31 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 45
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 23 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 31 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Programming The Memory Feature............................31 IF EQUIPPED b................................................................. 45
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 23 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 46
Remote Start Abort Message..................................... 23 Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory .............................32 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 46
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........................24 Memory Position Recall...............................................32 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 24 SEATS ................................................................................... 32 Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 46
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................24 Manual Front Seat Adjustment — Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
To Arm The System ..................................................... 24 If Equipped ...................................................................32 Opener ......................................................................... 46
To Disarm The System................................................ 25 Power Driver Seat Adjustment — Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Rearming Of The System............................................ 25 If Equipped ...................................................................33 Device .......................................................................... 47
Security System Manual Override.............................. 25 Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................34 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 47
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................35 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 47
Head Restraints ...........................................................36 Security ........................................................................ 48
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 48
EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................................49 CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................... 56 TAILGATE ............................................................................. 76

Headlight Switch ......................................................... 49 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Opening........................................................................ 76
Multifunction Lever ..................................................... 49 Functions......................................................................56 Closing.......................................................................... 76
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — Manual Climate Control Descriptions And Tailgate Removal......................................................... 76
If Equipped .................................................................. 50 Functions......................................................................59 Bed Step — If Equipped............................................... 78
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 50 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)........................61 PICKUP BOX ....................................................................... 79
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Climate Voice Recognition — Cargo Camera — If Equipped ...................................... 80
If Equipped .................................................................. 50 If Equipped ...................................................................61 Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 50 Operating Tips .............................................................61 If Equipped .................................................................. 81
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 50 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................ 62 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED................................................... 82
Directional LED Headlamp Storage .........................................................................62 Locking And Unlocking RamBox................................. 82
System — If Equipped ................................................. 51 USB/AUX Control .........................................................68 RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................................... 82
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................................. 51 Electrical Power Outlets ..............................................69 RamBox Safety Warning ............................................. 84
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............................ 51 Power Inverter — If Equipped .....................................70 Bed Divider — If Equipped........................................... 85
Headlight Illumination On Approach.......................... 51 Wireless Charging Pad — TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED................... 86
Headlight Delay ........................................................... 51 If Equipped ..................................................................72 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ............................... 86
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 51 WINDOWS ..........................................................................72 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ........................... 88
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 52 Power Windows ...........................................................72 Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 91
Turn Signals................................................................. 52 Automatic Window Features.......................................73
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 52 Reset Auto-Up .............................................................73 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/Trailer Window Lockout Switch ..............................................73 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hitch Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped ............... 52 Power Sliding Rear Window —
Battery Saver............................................................... 53 If Equipped ..................................................................74 MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE .......... 92
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................53 Manual Sliding Rear Window — Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Courtesy Lights............................................................ 53 If Equipped ...................................................................74 Gas Engine b ............................................................ 93
Illuminated Entry ........................................................ 55 Wind Buffeting ............................................................74 HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE ........ 94
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................55 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED................................... 74 Highline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 55 Single Pane Power Sunroof ........................................74 Gas Engine................................................................... 95
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 56 HOOD.................................................................................... 75 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE............ 96
To Open The Hood ......................................................75 Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
To Close The Hood.......................................................76 Gasoline ...................................................................... 97
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE ....98 STARTING AND OPERATING Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed ................136
Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions — Operating Precautions ..............................................136
Diesel Engine............................................................... 99 STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE ............ 125 Cooling System Tips ..................................................136
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Automatic Transmission........................................... 125 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......................137
DIESEL ENGINE ............................................................... 100 Tip Start Feature ...................................................... 125 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
Highline Instrument Cluster Descriptions — Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .............................. 125 GASOLINE ENGINE ...........................................................137
Diesel Engine............................................................. 101 Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL............... 102 Button ....................................................................... 125 DIESEL ENGINE.................................................................137
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions — AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and PARKING BRAKE .............................................................138
Diesel ......................................................................... 104 8-Speed Transmission Only ..................................... 126 DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE —
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ................................. 104 Extended Park Starting ............................................ 127 ENGINE BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) ..................................139
Instrument Cluster Display Location and If Engine Fails To Start ............................................ 128 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .........................................140
Controls ..................................................................... 104 Cold Weather Operation Ignition Park Interlock ...............................................140
Oil Life Reset b....................................................... 107 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ........................................ 128 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Display Menu Items .................................................. 107 After Starting ............................................................. 128 System ......................................................................141
Diesel Messages And Warnings — 6.7L Cummins® STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE................... 128 8-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....141
Diesel Engine............................................................. 111 Automatic Transmission........................................... 129 6-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....144
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .............................. 129 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED..........................148
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped ... 114 Extreme Cold Weather.............................................. 130 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION .......................................148
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.............................. 115 Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
Red Warning Lights................................................... 115 Air Temperature Above 66° F (19° C) .................... 130 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................148
Yellow Warning Lights............................................... 117 Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Electronically Shifted Transfer
Yellow Indicator Lights.............................................. 120 Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C) ... 131 Case (8-Speed Transmission) —
Green Indicator Lights .............................................. 122 Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold If Equipped.................................................................148
White Indicator Lights............................................... 123 Air Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ....................... 132 Electronically Shifted Transfer
Blue Indicator Lights................................................. 123 Starting Fluids........................................................... 132 Case (6-Speed Transmission) —
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ................. 123 NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ..................... 133 If Equipped.................................................................151
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cold Weather Precautions ....................................... 133 Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped .......153
Cybersecurity............................................................. 124 Engine Idling ............................................................. 134 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................155
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Noise.......................................................................... 135 Description.................................................................155
PROGRAMS ...................................................................... 124 Stopping The Engine................................................. 135 Air Suspension Modes ..............................................155
Idle Shutdown ........................................................... 136 Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....................156
Operation ...................................................................156
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED......................... 156 PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................203
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 183 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......................203
POWER WAGON ONLY .................................................... 157 ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 183 Payload ......................................................................203
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON, ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 183 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............................204
REBEL OR OFF-ROAD PACKAGE EQUIPPED ONLY...... 158 ParkSense Display.................................................... 183 Tire Size......................................................................204
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rim Size .....................................................................204
Characteristics .......................................................... 158 Rear ParkSense ........................................................ 186 Inflation Pressure ......................................................204
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand............................... 159 Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Curb Weight ...............................................................204
Crossing Obstacles Park Assist System ................................................... 186 Loading ......................................................................204
(Rocks And Other High Points) ................................. 160 Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 186 TRAILER TOWING .............................................................204
Hill Climbing............................................................... 161 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 186 Common Towing Definitions.....................................204
Driving Through Water.............................................. 162 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ......................................... 187 Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight .....208
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving............................. 163 LaneSense Operation............................................... 187 Trailer Towing Weights
Vehicle Recovery ....................................................... 164 Turning LaneSense On Or Off .................................. 187 (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................208
After Driving Off-Road ............................................... 165 LaneSense Warning Message ................................. 188 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................................208
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ........................................ 166 Changing LaneSense Status.................................... 189 Trailer Reverse Steering
WINCH USAGE — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 166 Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist — Control — If Equipped................................................209
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch............... 166 If Equipped ................................................................ 189 Towing Requirements ..............................................212
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch ........... 167 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .......................... 190 Towing Tips ...............................................................217
Winch Accessories ................................................... 167 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — SNOWPLOW .....................................................................217
Operating Your Winch .............................................. 168 IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 191 Before Plowing...........................................................217
Rigging Techniques .................................................. 172 TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 196 Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability ............218
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ..................................... 173 Trailer Surround View Camera System ................... 196 Over The Road Operation With
Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Check..................... 173 AUX Camera .............................................................. 199 Snowplow Attached...................................................218
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .............. 174 ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE.......................... 199 Operating Tips ...........................................................218
Cruise Control ........................................................... 174 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE ........ 200 General Maintenance ...............................................218
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................. 175 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............................... 200 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....219
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE .............. 201 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........219
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ................................................. 201 Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models....220
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models...220
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 223 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ....................................... 284 SAFETY
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ................................... 223 Connected Services SOS FAQs —
Driving Through Water ............................................. 223 If Equipped ............................................................... 284 SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................295
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 224 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................295
FAQs .......................................................................... 284 Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ............................296
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................296
MULTIMEDIA Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs ... 285
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs — AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .......................................301
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 225 If Equipped ............................................................... 285 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 225 Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs .............. 285 If Equipped ................................................................301
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................................... 226 Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance FAQs — Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 226 If Equipped ............................................................... 286 If Equipped.................................................................306
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 250 Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs ... 286 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............309
System Overview....................................................... 250 Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs .... 286 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................315
Safety And General Information............................... 252 Connected Services Account Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................315
UCONNECT MODES.......................................................... 253 FAQs — If Equipped................................................... 287 Important Safety Precautions...................................316
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................ 253 Data Collection & Privacy......................................... 288 Seat Belt Systems ....................................................316
Radio Mode .............................................................. 253 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 288 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................323
Media Mode ............................................................. 261 Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 289 Child Restraints .........................................................330
Phone Mode ............................................................. 263 OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 289 SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................346
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — Off-Road Pages Status Bar ...................................... 290 Transporting Passengers ..........................................346
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 272 Vehicle Dynamics...................................................... 291 Transporting Pets .....................................................346
Is My Vehicle Connected? ........................................ 272 Accessory Gauge ...................................................... 292 Connected Vehicles...................................................346
Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services .......... 272 Pitch & Roll................................................................ 293 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle Suspension ............................................................... 294 The Vehicle ...............................................................346
Services .................................................................... 273 Forward Facing Camera ........................................... 294 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ...................................... 275 Outside The Vehicle ..................................................347
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account ............. 284 Exhaust Gas...............................................................348
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Windshield Wiper Blades..........................................391

Exhaust System ........................................................393
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 349 SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 369 Cooling System .........................................................394
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................. 349 Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine..................... 371 Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler .............................396
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING b ............................... 352 Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine ........................ 373 Brake System ...........................................................397
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 353 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 377 Automatic Transmission ...........................................397
Jack Location............................................................. 353 6.4L Gasoline Engine .............................................. 377 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Removal Of Jack And Tools ...................................... 353 6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed 68RFE ................... 378 Level ..........................................................................399
Removing The Spare Tire ......................................... 354 6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed AS69RC HD............ 379 Transfer Case ...........................................................400
Jacking Instructions .................................................. 355 Checking Oil Level .................................................... 380 Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ....................................... 358 Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 380 Warranty ....................................................................400
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools............................... 359 Maintenance-Free Battery ....................................... 380 Fuses..........................................................................403
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — Pressure Washing..................................................... 381 Bulb Replacement.....................................................410
If Equipped ................................................................ 360 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 381 TIRES..................................................................................416
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 361 Engine Oil ................................................................. 381 Tire Safety Information ............................................416
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 361 Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 382 Tires — General Information .....................................421
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 361 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 382 Tire Types...................................................................425
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .......................................... 362 Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 384 Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................425
6–Speed Transmission ............................................ 362 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 386 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................427
MANUAL PARK RELEASE................................................ 363 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Snow Traction Devices .............................................427
8–Speed Transmission............................................. 363 Diesel Engine ........................................................... 387 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................430
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 364 Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement — DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 365 Diesel Engine ............................................................ 388 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................432
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...................................... 366 Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement — Treadwear..................................................................432
Two-Wheel Drive Models .......................................... 367 Diesel Engine ............................................................ 389 Traction Grades .........................................................432
Four-Wheel Drive Models ......................................... 367 Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel — Temperature Grades .................................................433
Emergency Tow Hooks — Diesel Engine ............................................................ 390 STORING THE VEHICLE ...................................................433
If Equipped ................................................................ 368 Intervention Regeneration Strategy — BODYWORK ......................................................................433
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Message Process Flow ............................................ 390 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................433
SYSTEM (EARS) ............................................................... 368 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)....................................... 391 Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................434
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 368 Body Lubrication....................................................... 391 Preserving The Bodywork .........................................434
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 435 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Mexico........................................................................451

Seats And Fabric Parts ............................................. 435 Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 441 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................451
Plastic And Coated Parts .......................................... 436 Fuel System Cautions............................................... 441 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Leather Surfaces....................................................... 437 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ..................... 442 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................................451
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 437 Fuel Specifications .................................................. 442 Service Contract ........................................................451
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements................................... 443 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................452
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 444 MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................452
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................. 446 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................452
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 438 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 448 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........452
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 438 In Canada...................................................................452
Hydraulic Brake Assist —
If Equipped ................................................................ 438
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................453
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................453
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 438 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................454
Torque Specifications ............................................... 438 YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................ 449 GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................454
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE .............. 440 Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 449
6.4L Engine ............................................................... 440 Prepare A List............................................................ 449
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................ 440 Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 449
Materials Added To Fuel........................................... 440 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 449
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 441 Roadside Assistance ................................................ 449
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............. 441 FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 451
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .................. 441 FCA Canada Customer Care .................................... 451
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision Ú page 223.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
10
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements apply to operating procedures that The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special
WARNING!
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders.
US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
CAUTION! refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information. Such equipment
damage to your vehicle.
includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE:
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
product or functionality.
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United States
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic Safety
Follow this reference for additional information on a Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of accommodating
particular feature. slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall provide... at the time of
original purchase to the first person who purchases the truck”... information on
Truck Camper Loading.
FOOTNOTE
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment that contains
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo weight rating, and the forward/
the topic. rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional dimensional and technical specifications
for your vehicle, please visit https://www.ramtrucks.com.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
11
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located, to provide satisfactory
vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
1
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
12
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists NOTE:
of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed
the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s Red Warning Lights
recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. Air Bag Warning Light
When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and rear wheels Ú page 115
separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross
Battery Charge Warning Light
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to
get the total weight below the ratings. Ú page 116
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the driver’s Brake Warning Light
side B-pillar. See Ú page 203 for more information.
Ú page 115
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer or
an authorized dealer.
Door Open Warning Light
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Ú page 116
WARNING! Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness Ú page 116
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Ú page 116
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating Hood Open Warning Light
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol Ú page 115. Ú page 117
13
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

1
Ú page 117 Ú page 117
Oil Temperature Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
LaneSense Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Ú page 118
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 117
Ú page 118
14
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Ú page 118 Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 120
Ú page 118
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light
Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light
Ú page 120
Ú page 119
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light
Braking (PEB) Warning Light Ú page 120
Ú page 119
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 120
Ú page 119
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 120
Ú page 119
Cargo Indicator Light
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 121
Ú page 119
15
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light

1
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)

Snowplow Mode Indicator Light
Off Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Ú page 121
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Sway Bar Indicator Light
4WD Lock Indicator Light TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

4WD Low Indicator Light Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light

4WD High Indicator Light Wait To Start Indicator Light

Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light Water In Fuel Indicator Light
16
Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light
Ú page 122 White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Ú page 122
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Ú page 122
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Ú page 122
LaneSense Indicator Light
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Ú page 122
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

Ú page 122
High Beam Indicator Light
LaneSense Indicator Light Ú page 123
Ú page 122
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
KEY F OB
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to 2
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which follow.
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), NOTE:
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED
all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu-
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to minates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to battery requires replacement Ú page 454.
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
rear of the key fob. Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
NOTE: once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within
Key Fob five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and the
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other 1 — Unlock tailgate, push the lock button once.
electronic device. This may result in poor performance. 2 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped) When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging 3 — Lock and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed 4 — Remote Start (If Equipped) the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad Ú page 72. horn will chirp.
5 — Panic
 With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle 6 — Emergency Key All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the lock button
disabled. is pushed can be programmed on/off within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 226.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Feature The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with 1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing the
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights. emergency key release button (2) on the side of the
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic button key fob, and pulling the emergency key out with your
on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, the NOTE:
other hand.
turn signals will flash, the horn may pulse on and off (if  The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights will the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
turn on. feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless you  These alerts will not be activated in situations where
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
or driving the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or inside.
greater.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
NOTE:
The replacement battery model is one CR2032 battery.
 The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is acti- NOTE:
vated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if  Customers are recommended to use a battery
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on. obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
Emergency Key Removal
 You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic dimensions. 1 — Emergency Key
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the  Perchlorate material — special handling may apply. 2 — Emergency Key Release Button
system. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Key Left Vehicle Feature 2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
housing or the printed circuit board. between the housing and the back cover of the key
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The  Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key fob fob. Use a small screwdriver (or similar tool) to pry
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display above the top row buttons blinks when a button is open the left side of the fob cover while applying
along with sounding an interior chime. An exterior audible pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum of pressure until the cover snaps open.
and visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver. three years with normal vehicle usage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob, 5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
which is positioned farther to the edge than the left down and slide the battery under the small lip on the WARNING!
side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the top edge of the opening.  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
back cover. Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
4. Remove the battery by using a suitable tool, such as hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
a screwdriver, to slide the battery downward and cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
back toward the key ring. can lead to death. 2
 If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
 Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from
children.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge of Programming And Requesting Additional
the back cover with the top of the fob, and press the
edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges snap
Key Fobs
Key Fob Battery Location together with no large visual gaps. Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE: 7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on the NOTE:
NOTE:
battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new battery  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio- repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
authorized dealer.  Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
WARNING!
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
IGNITION SWITCH
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
 Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used passenger compartment.
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle. to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
seconds. modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
that has never been programmed. indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
NOTE: this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho- CAUTION!
rized dealer.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
the vehicle locks.
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
Keyless Push Button Ignition
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system been programmed to the vehicle electronics Ú page 454. 1 — OFF
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is 2 — ACC (Accessory)
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also 3 — ON/RUN
unlocked.
considered an invalid key.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following

modes: WARNING!
OFF  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
 The engine is stopped
serious injury or death.
 Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available 2
ACC CAUTION!
 Engine is not started An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
 Some electrical devices are available remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.) when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Backup Starting Method
RUN
 Driving position WARNING! NOTE:
 All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless
controls, heated seats, etc.) from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
START  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
 The engine will start (when foot is on the brake) access to an unlocked vehicle. Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
NOTE:  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is  For more information on engine starting procedures,
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by pushing dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others see Ú page 125.
the button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
 When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the pedal or the gear selector.
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
a location accessible to children, and do not leave “Ignition or Accessory ON” will display in the instrument
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN cluster display.
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
(GASOLINE) 15 minute cycle.
 Panic button not pushed
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
This system uses the key fob to start the engine engine off.  Fuel meets minimum requirement
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still  System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
maintaining security. The system has a range To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the
of approximately 300 ft (91 m). ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Vehicle Security system not active
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather, NOTE:  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient  With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle. 15 minutes. WARNING!
NOTE:  Remote Start can only be used twice.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
reduce this range Ú page 454. monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
WARNING!  The parking lights will turn on and remain on during serious injury or death when inhaled.
Remote Start mode.
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
 For security, power window and power sunroof opera- Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in controls could cause serious injury or death.
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
the Remote Start mode.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the a third cycle.
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
controls could cause serious injury or death.  If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
will automatically lock the doors. while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the
All of the following conditions must be met before the 15 minute cycle.
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART engine will remote start: The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob  Gear selector in PARK Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
 Doors closed
the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
 Hood closed climate controls will resume the previously set operations
 Hazard switch off (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE: the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
climate control settings depending on the outside ambient
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
temperature. DE-I CER ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru- Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
ignition button. temperature and mode, dependent on the outside Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
2
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
Remote Start request. previous settings.
REMOTE START ABORT M ESSAGE
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST One of the following messages will display in the
 In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED climate settings will default to maximum heat, with instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.  Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F  Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature. (26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last  Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically settings selected by the driver.
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.  Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
 In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the
See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
next section for detailed operation. with Recirculation on. The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control the ON/RUN position.
settings, see Ú page 56.
I F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated Start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
steering wheel and driver heated/vented seat feature will position. The climate control settings will change, and exit
turn on if programmed in the seats and Comfort menu the automatic defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226. In warm while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turning the climate controls off using the OFF button.
turn on when Remote Start is activated, if programmed in
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine  Gear selector in PARK The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
 Doors closed
maintaining security. The system has a range unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
of approximately 300 ft (91 m).  Hood closed is armed, interior switches for door locks and tailgate
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,  Hazard switch off release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) and visible signals:
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
 Battery at an acceptable charge level  The horn will pulse
NOTE:
 Panic button not pushed  The turn signals will flash
 Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
 Fuel meets minimum requirement  The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
reduce this range.
 Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated flash
 The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To Start
Indicator Light to extinguish before cranking the
engine. This allows time for the engine preheat cycle to
 Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather. Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
For further information on the Wait To Start Indicator For additional functions of the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 22. 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
Light and the preheat cycle, see Ú page 122. OFF position.
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART WARNING!  For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. vehicle:
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause  Push the lock button on the interior power door
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute serious injury or death when inhaled. lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
cycle.  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the open.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
engine off. controls could cause serious injury or death. door handle with a valid key fob available in the
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the same exterior zone Ú page 26.
ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
the following methods: exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
 Push the unlock button on the key fob. occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM 2
Ú page 26.
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
 Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
system. after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
NOTE: and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
then rearm itself. Door Lock Knob
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder
when the system is armed will sound the alarm when
SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE WARNING!
the door is opened. The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 The Vehicle Security system remains armed when the doors using the manual door lock. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
power tailgate (if equipped) is opened using the tail- cause serious injury or death.
gate button on the key fob. DOORS  For personal security and safety in the event of an
 If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the tail- collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
gate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the MANUAL D OOR L OCKS as when you park and leave the vehicle.
rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door, transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
Settings.
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel place the ignition in the OFF position, remove the key
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors to completely
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull lock your vehicle.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the
lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
vehicle before closing the door. vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in NOTE: injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Security system.
Vehicle Security system. (Continued)
WARNING!
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob is KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button on
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is the front door panel is used to lock the door. E NTRY (I F EQUIPPED)
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others This will occur for two attempts. Upon the third attempt,
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should the doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
pedal or the gear selector. If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in other electronic device, the wireless signal may get blocked, buttons.
a location accessible to children, and do not leave and the driver’s door may not unlock automatically.
NOTE:
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in the
 Passive Entry may be programmed on or off within
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's door is open, the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob. laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors. POWER S IDE STEPS — I F EQUIPPED Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
 Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated approach
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier entry
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
and exit of the vehicle.
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90
When configured for Auto mode, the Power Side Steps will seconds. Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
deploy when any of the doors are opened, or when the flashes of the turn signals.
deploy setting is activated through the touchscreen. When
 If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
configured for Store mode, the steps will not deploy unless
if there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
the setting is selected manually through the Controls
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
menu within the touchscreen.
in a slower response time.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if the
 The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
retract setting is selected within Uconnect Settings
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
Ú page 226, the steps will retract. outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
Power Door Lock Switches  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
(if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the in any Passive Entry vehicle: With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.  A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob (1.5 m) of either front door handles, pushing the Passive
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver while a door is open. Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
will unlock all doors and the tailgate automatically. handle while a door is open. 2
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
 When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
armed status and the tailgate transitions from open to
closed.
 When the tailgate transitions from open to closed and
Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
 Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect are true:
system Ú page 226.  The doors are manually locked using the door lock
 All doors will unlock when the front passenger door knobs.
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door  Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
unlock preference setting. door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)  There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry handle.
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — NOTE:

 After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
I F E QUIPPED  After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. certain it is in the unlocked position.
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when  After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
door handle without the vehicle unlocking. the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto always test the door from the inside to make certain it
 If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect door lock feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect is in the locked position.
Settings, the key fob protection described in Settings Ú page 226.
 For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional. CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK the door lock knob (unlocked position), lower the
window, and open the door with the outside door
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob To provide a safer environment for small children riding in handle.
battery is depleted Ú page 17. the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system. WARNING!
 The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the key fob
battery is low or fully depleted, but a low key fob battery To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
condition will still support the Passive Entry system screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock Remember that the rear doors cannot be opened from
functionality. When the key fob battery is low, the position. When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door
instrument cluster will display a message indicating engaged, the door can be opened only by using the Locks are engaged.
that the key fob battery is low Ú page 454. outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT — NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
I F EQUIPPED engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
door locks after the following sequence of actions: internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226. sure to check that there is no one left inside.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed
in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Child Lock Control
STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

 Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
TILT STEERING COLUMN Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
 Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
NOTE:
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
column, below the multifunction lever. warning may result in serious injury or death.
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel 2
to operate.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — Ú page 23.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in I F E QUIPPED WARNING!
place.
The steering wheel contains a heating element
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
The heated steering wheel has only one
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
when it is already warm.
for long periods.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the center
of the instrument panel below the radio screen, or within  Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
the climate or comfort screen of the touchscreen. insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type or material. This may cause
NOTE: the steering wheel heater to overheat.
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will
Tilt Steering Lever only be control buttons through the touchscreen.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — BASIC VOICE COMMANDS 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
IF EQUIPPED The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
the beep, then say your Voice Command. You can
also say the vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your
command. Some examples of “Wake Up” words
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/5 NAV, say include “Hey, Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word, “Hey Uconnect”.
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful 5. You can interrupt the help message or system
After the beep, say:
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. saying a Voice Command from the current category.
Recognition (VR) system.  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default “Wake Up”
word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings.
GET S TARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device 1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the instructions. To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or
Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 5 with Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and 1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles Not
8.4-inch display system.
passenger conversations are examples of noise that Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button
may impact recognition. To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while 2 — Push To Access The Tile Feature
facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in 3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently
the headliner and aimed at the driver. In Progress
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION  Side mirrors PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE

 A set of desired radio station presets
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
Uconnect are registered trademarks, and Mopar Owner NOTE:
NOTE:
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all  If equipped with power convex mirrors, these mirror Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® positions will not set as part of a memory profile from memory.
Radio Inc. Ú page 38. 2
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
Uconnect System Support:  Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be (do not start the engine).
 US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) The driver memory settings switch is located on the driver preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
 Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or door, next to the door handle, and consists of three adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio station
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or buttons: presets).
1-800-387-9983 (French)  The set (S) button, which is used to activate the 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support: memory save function. then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
 US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/  The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either five seconds. The instrument cluster display will show
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 of two saved memory profiles. which memory position has been set.
 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon- NOTE:

nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
1-877-324-9091 but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
 Driver’s seat
 Easy Entry/Exit Seat operation (if equipped) Driver Memory Settings Buttons
 Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE MEMORY POSITION R ECALL MANUAL F RONT S EAT ADJUSTMENT —
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY F OB T O M EMORY NOTE: I F E QUIPPED
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
message will display in the instrument cluster display. Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
saved memory profiles.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push Adjustment
NOTE:
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
Before programming your key fob you must select the
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
position. seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Uconnect system Ú page 226.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
To program your key fob, perform the following: buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. second will occur before another recall can be selected.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release

the set (S) button on the memory switch. SEATS
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the vehicle.
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob WARNING!
within 10 seconds.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the killed. the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. have reached the desired position. Then, using body
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.  Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actu-
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of ating the handle. The seatback may swing forward
control which could cause a collision and serious and hit you causing injury.
injury or death.
 To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and 2
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious desired position.
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat —
If Equipped Power Seat Switches
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment 1 — Power Seat Switch
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. If 2 — Power Seatback Switch
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, equipped, the back of the center portion (20%) easily
lean back to the desired position and release the lever. folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean compartment. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
seatback is in the upright position. POWER D RIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT — using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
I F E QUIPPED direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and passenger seats. The power seat switches Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
are located on the outboard side of the driver and The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by
passenger seat cushions. There are two power seat using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
switches that are used to control the movement of the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
seat cushion and the seatback. desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down
using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion
Manual Recline Lever will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar (2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or support. seat will return to its previously set position when you
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will place the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position.
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.  The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (2.27 cm)
WARNING! forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Easy Entry.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
control which could cause a collision and serious
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
injury or death.
Ú page 31.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
NOTE:
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
Lumbar Control Switch the programmable features in the Uconnect system
belt.
Ú page 226.
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Easy Entry/Exit Seat
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the On some models, the front and rear seats may be
which could result in serious injury or death. vehicle. equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where seatbacks.
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you place the
CAUTION! ignition in the OFF position. WARNING!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat tion, the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches (6 cm) because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. equal to 2.7 inches (6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. tion or other physical condition must exercise care
The seat will return to its previously set position when when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
you place the ignition into the ACC or ON/RUN position. at low temperatures, especially if used for long
Power Lumbar — If Equipped periods of time.
 When you remove the key fob from the ignition, the
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats driver’s seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (Continued)
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power (0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
WARNING!
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED
Ú page 23.
 Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that Rear Heated Seats Front Ventilated Seats
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in On some models, the two outboard rear seats
draw the air from the passenger compartment
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious are equipped with heated seats. The heated
burns due to the increased surface temperature of seat switches for these seats are located on and move air through fine perforations in the 2
seat cover to help keep the driver and front
the seat. the rear of the center console.
passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED and LO.
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
Front Heated Seats choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and
The heated seats control buttons are located indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
are also located within the Climate or Comfort screen of
on the center instrument panel below the use.
the touchscreen.
touchscreen, or located within the Climate or  Push the heated seat button once to turn the
Comfort screen of the touchscreen. HI setting on. NOTE:
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will
 Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the only be control buttons through the touchscreen.
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will MED setting on.
only be control buttons through the touchscreen.  Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
 Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
 Press the heated seat button once to turn the LO setting on.  Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
HI setting on. choose MED.
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
 Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the heating elements off.  Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
MED setting on. choose LO.
NOTE:
 Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the  Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn
LO setting on.  The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator the ventilation off.
changes it.
 Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the NOTE:
heating elements off.  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
two to five minutes. operate.
NOTE:
 The engine must be running for the heated seats to For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
 The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
operate. Ú page 23.
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. the top of the head restraint to the forward most position
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the and release. The head restraint will return to the rear
head restraint is located above the top of your ear. most position.
WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
of a crash.
NOTE:
 Head restraints should never be adjusted while the If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head center head restraint is not adjustable or removable.
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision. WARNING!
Forward Adjustment  All occupants, including the driver, should not
NOTE: NOTE: operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/locking positions. head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi- When pulling fully forward, the head restraint will spring order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
tional clearance to the back of your head. back to the untilted, rearward most position when of a crash.
Front Head Restraints released.  Head restraints should never be adjusted while
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way driver Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way driver
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
and passenger head restraints. and passenger head restraints.
a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push button, located at the base of head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. downward on the head restraint.
Front Head Restraint Removal To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button Rear Head Restraint Removal
located on the base of the head restraint and push
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped downward on the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height. 2
appropriate height. NOTE:
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must
be folded up.
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head WARNING!
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
WARNING! hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or Release/Adjustment Buttons head restraints in a location outside the occupant
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu- compartment.
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed 1 — Release Button
head restraints in a location outside the occupant 2 — Adjustment Button  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
compartment. vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the NOTE: vehicle or occupying a seat.
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the  The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has only one
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of
vehicle or occupying a seat. a tether Ú page 315.
 Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint,
pull upward on the head restraint.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — NOTE: Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
 Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
IF EQUIPPED movement of the pedal.
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a  Further small adjustments may be necessary to find windshield).
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and the best possible seat/pedal position.
seat position. This feature allows the brake and  For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, you
accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
to provide improved position with the steering wheel. memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the adjustable pedals to saved positions Ú page 31.
the steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

CAUTION!
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the through the rear window.
Adjustable Pedals Switch adjustable pedal's path. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
NOTE:
REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is on. If there
is an attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is
MIRRORS The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
locked out, one of the following messages will appear (on the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display):
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
 Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged Manual Mirror — If Equipped through the touchscreen.
 Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right.
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Tri-View Tow Mode (if equipped)

The Tri-View Tow Mode will display the left and right sides of
the back of the vehicle using the outside mirror cameras
and the back of the trailer using an auxiliary camera.
Tow Mode - Back of trailer (if equipped)
The Tow Mode will display a wide screen view of the back 2
of the trailer using an auxiliary camera.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Push the Menu button next to the on/off control to access
the following mirror adjustment options:
CAUTION!
 Tilt (up/down)
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never Digital Rearview Mirror
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.  Pan (left/right)
1 — View Button
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the  Rotate
mirror clean. 2 — On/Off Control Lever
 Zoom
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Scroll Button  Brightness
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped 5 — Right Scroll Button Options can be customized for each camera by pressing
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition, the View button until desired camera is highlighted.
wide and unobstructed view of the road and traffic behind Push the Menu button to scroll through the menu options
the vehicle, as well as a trailer when Tow Mode Camera is Push the View button to the left of the on/off control to
and use left and right scroll buttons to change settings.
equipped, while driving forward (not recommended for access the following view options:
The menu will lockout when vehicle is traveling above
use as a Back Up Camera). Rearview Camera - Back of vehicle
8 mph (12 kph). Once this happens, the menu options
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming This is the default view of the Digital Rearview Camera. cannot be changed (view can still be changed).
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror It displays a wide screen view of the back of the vehicle.
mode. NOTE:
Split Screen Tow Mode (if equipped) The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off The Split Screen Tow Mode will display the left and right nighttime driving in low light applications due to low
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward toward sides of the back of the vehicle using the outside mirror ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the user
the driver. cameras. with less than expected vision, the mirror can be reverted
When Digital Rearview Mode is not in use, push the on/off to a normal reflective Automatic Dimming Mirror by
control lever forward toward the windshield to return the pushing the on/off control lever toward the windshield and
mirror to the regular Automatic Dimming Mirror. putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
Tow Mode Camera Signal Lost - Single View I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional auxiliary This indication will appear when the Rearview
trailer camera to be mounted on the rear of a trailer. Camera has lost its signal.
I F E QUIPPED
When the camera is connected, the display in the Digital To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
Rearview Mirror automatically switches to the trailer visors and lift the cover.
camera. Your vehicle may also include additional cameras Camera Signal Lost - Multiview
in the outside mirrors, which will allow you to use Split This indication will appear when the camera
Screen and Tri-View Tow Mode views. effected has lost its signal in either Split Screen
To return to the Rearview Camera display toggle through or Tri-View.
the menu options using the control buttons on the mirror.
Communication Lost
The following indications may be displayed on the Digital
Rearview Mirror: This indication will appear when the Digital
Rearview Camera has lost communication with
Digital Mode
the vehicle.
This indication will appear when the Rearview
Camera is utilizing the cameras on the vehicle. If a camera signal is lost, switch to Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode.
For more information on trailer camera options, see Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
Tow Mode - If Equipped
Ú page 196.
This indication will appear when the Rearview Slide-On-Rod Feature Of Sun Visor —
Camera is utilizing an auxiliary camera WARNING! If Equipped
attached to the trailer.
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
The Digital Rearview Mirror mode has a limited view.
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
View Switching In Progress Portions of the road, vehicles, and other objects may
not be seen, especially while backing up. 1. Fold down the sun visor.
This indication will appear when camera view
switching is in progress. 2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the driver or
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and
farther away than they really are. Relying only on the
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when 2
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
convex mirror.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
Trailer Tow Telescoping Mirrors Power Telescoping Mirror Switch
Your vehicle may be equipped with manual or power trailer
NOTE: telescoping mirrors. These mirrors are designed with an To adjust the outside mirrors, push the Telescoping Mirror
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is adjustable mirror head that can be extended when Switch. Use the left and right arrows on the directional
against the windshield for additional sun blockage trailering to provide a greater vision range when towing button to move both driver’s and passenger mirrors
through the front of the vehicle. extra-wide loads. outward or inward to desired position.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS Power Telescoping Mirrors

The Power Telescoping Mirror Switch is located on the
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls. The
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
switch enables the driver to extend or retract the mirror
NOTE: head.
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under the
outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the
Power Telescoping Mirror (Extended Position)

To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power
Telescoping Mirror Switch a second time.
Manual Telescoping Mirrors OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING

To extend the Manual Telescoping Mirrors pull the mirror
outward to desired position. To return to normal position,
MIRROR — I F EQUIPPED
push the mirror inward all the way. The exterior mirrors will automatically adjust for glare from
vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirror will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
Folding Mirror
driver's door trim panel.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
Manual Telescoping Mirror (Extended Position)
car wash or a narrow location.
NOTE:
Return the trailer towing mirrors to normal driving position
or fold the mirrors prior to entering an automated car Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal —
wash. If Equipped
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located at the back of
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
the mirror.
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage. Power Mirror Controls
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the 1 — Left Mirror Selection
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also 2 — Mirror Direction Control
activate these LEDs. 3 — Right Mirror Selection
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons If the mirror is manually folded after a powered cycle, a AUTOMATIC POWER F OLDING
and a four-way mirror control switch. potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) back to the normal driving position. If the mirror does not MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. fold automatically, check for ice or dirt buildup at the pivot
When enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226, the
area, which can cause excessive drag.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the vehicle’s
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after the doors 2
are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
 Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button again.
 Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on the
door panel, followed by closing the door.
Power Folding Mirror Switch  After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push the
lock button on the key fob.
Power Mirror Movement Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
 After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch the
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
POWER F OLDING OUTSIDE M IRRORS — following occurs:
lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
I F EQUIPPED  The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they will
unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward and  The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded
NOTE:
unfolded into the normal driving position. (by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch).
If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the power
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located  The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving not automatically unfold.
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the speeds.
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
normal driving position.
by pushing the button (this may require multiple
attempts). This resets them to their normal driving
position.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — NOTE:

If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a second
I F EQUIPPED time, the switch will automatically default back to the
larger portion of the outside mirrors after a period of time.
This feature provides automatic outside mirror positioning
which will assist with the driver’s ground visibility. The FORWARD U TILITY LIGHTS AND REAR
outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the
present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. GUIDANCE LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will then return to the original position
The forward utility lights and reverse guidance lights
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the vehicle
switches are located on the drivers door trim panel, above
is equipped with Driver Memory Settings, this feature will
the power mirror controls. These switches enable the
be linked to the programmable settings.
forward or reverse lights located on the driver and
NOTE: Power Convex Mirror Switch
passenger outside mirrors.
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors, push
and off using the Uconnect system Ú page 226. the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select the mirror
you want to adjust by using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.
POWER C ONVEX M IRROR SWITCH — Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four
I F EQUIPPED arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move.
To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the door Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
trim panel, above the power mirror controls. The switch
enables the movement of the convex portion of both the
driver and passenger outside mirrors.
Forward and Reverse Light Switches

When either button is pressed the corresponding light on
the outside mirror will remain on for ten minutes. The
vehicle must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position. When the
light is active, the switch on the door panel will illuminate.
Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights off.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror

The rear guidance lights will also illuminate when the Use this QR code to access your digital
cargo light switch is pressed on the headlight switch experience.
panel. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect  HomeLink® replaces up to three
system Ú page 226. hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED openers, motorized gates, lighting,
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. or home security systems. The 2
This feature will be activated whenever you HomeLink® unit is powered by your
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
Ú page 56.  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
Forward Utility Light
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink® channels.
 To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 454.
Reverse Guidance Light

When the lights are activated using the switch on the door
panel, the reverse guidance lights will illuminate when the HomeLink® Buttons
vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE
and the forward utility lights will illuminate in all ignition
positions. The rear guidance lights will turn off when the
vehicle transmission is placed in DRIVE.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A NOTE:

All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
HOMELINK® R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of DEVICE programming additional buttons.
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
rolling code or non-rolling code.
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is button you wish to program, while keeping the
programmed to activate the device you are trying to Rolling Code Devices HomeLink® indicator light in view.
program your HomeLink® button to. To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices program while you push and hold the garage door
before you begin programming. manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time. HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
happens, release both buttons.
by manufacturer.
C HANNELS NOTE: NOTE:
To erase the channels, follow this procedure: The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
normally use to operate the device. before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. steps.
Non-rolling Code Devices
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
HomeLink® indicator light flashes. rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or NOTE:
“TRAIN” button. You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
NOTE: step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
Erasing all channels should only be performed when PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons. GARAGE DOOR OPENER locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
garage door opener motor, refer to the following steps: push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the programming to a garage door opener Ú page 46. Be sure P ROGRAMMING 2
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
the final steps for the rolling code procedure. For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
code before beginning the programming process.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE: several seconds of transmission:
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to transmission, which may not be long enough for
programming is complete. pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to designed to time-out in the same manner.
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
the steps from the beginning. process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE door or gate motor.
WARNING!
HOMELINK® B UTTON 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
 Your motorized door or gate will open and close while NOTE:
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
the path of the door or gate. proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
confined area while programming the transmitter. remains open at all times.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. starting the engine.
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
can cause you and others to be severely injured or the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after indicator light in view.
killed. 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/ TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held Gate Operator)
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The follow these steps: are some of the most common solutions:
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when  Replace the battery in the garage door opener
fully trained. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
hand-held transmitter.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.  Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take complete the training for a rolling code.
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage Do not release the button.
door may open and close while you are programming. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with  Did you unplug the device for programming and
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and remember to plug it back in?
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light. follow all remaining steps. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
NOTE: SECURITY HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
ming is complete and the garage door/device your vehicle.
WARNING!
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
pushed.
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining erased. cause serious injury or death.
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when  Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for the Vehicle Security system is active. you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
programming, plug it back in at this time. not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch

clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
HEADLIGHT SWITCH lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the NOTE:
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
2
equipped), instrument panel light dimming, cargo light, clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
rear guidance lights (if equipped), and fog lights lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
(if equipped). parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada) position.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control MULTIFUNCTION L EVER
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
steering column.
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
Headlight Switch switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
1 — Rotate Headlight Control switch is placed in the parking lights position. However, Multifunction Lever
2 — Push Fog Light Switch the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP  The Automatic High Beams will not activate until the
vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). To opt out of
I F EQUIPPED CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED the Automatic High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default)
and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever the The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
recommended), toggle the multifunction lever six full
engine is running, and the low beams are not on. The provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. The
lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF high beam control through the use of a camera mounted
system will return to the default setting when the igni-
or ACC position, or the parking brake is engaged. on the inside rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
tion is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific light and
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running

automatically switch from high beams to low beams until FLASH-T O-P ASS
the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lights are turned on. NOTE:
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
 If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim until the lever is released.
on and off using the Uconnect system Ú page 226. High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226, as well as turning the headlight switch to AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may the AUTO position.
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
lights are activated). remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH lens will cause the system to function improperly.
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
 If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on. NOTE:
dealer.
The engine must be running before the headlights will turn
on in the Automatic Mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP  Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the APPROACH
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam) When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The
headlights continuously and automatically adapt to the
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed as the operator is approaching the vehicle.
2
is engaged.
driving conditions around bends or when cornering based This feature can be turned on/off, and the length of time
on steering wheel angle. AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS W ITH W IPERS the headlights stay on can be programmed for up to
The system directs the headlights to light up the road in 90 seconds within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
the best way, taking into account the speed of the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
and the bend or corner angle, as well as the speed of the also has this customer-programmable feature. When your HEADLIGHT DELAY
vehicle while the steering wheel is being turned. headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
The adaptive lights are automatically activated when the system is on. This feature is programmable through the feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
vehicle is traveling above approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
This system can be turned on/off through the Uconnect If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing Wiper headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
Settings under “Steering Directed Lights” Ú page 226. system Ú page 56, and it is activated, the headlights will canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then
automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS cycles within approximately one minute, and they will
off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the completely stop.  This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the system Ú page 226.
NOTE:
O (off) position. When your headlights come on during the daytime, the  The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if
NOTE: instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower the headlight switch is left in the AUTO position when
nighttime intensity. the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight switch
position is the parking lights and instrument panel LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
lights position (instead of the OFF position).
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound and a message will appear in the instrument cluster
display when the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED TURN SIGNALS

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
low beam headlights and push the fog light switch located turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
within the headlight switch. Pushing the fog light switch a cluster flash to show proper operation.
second time will turn the front fog lights off. NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
For information on Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist,
see Ú page 189.
Fog Light Switch
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
LIGHTS/TRAILER H ITCH L IGHT W ITH
BED LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and trailer
hitch light are turned on by pushing the cargo light button Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
located on the lower half of the headlight switch. (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can also be

turned on using the switch located just inside the pickup
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of California
INTERIOR LIGHTS
box, on the lower part of the bed light lens. A telltale will or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror spotter lights will
illuminate in the instrument cluster display when these not work while the vehicle is in motion. In every other COURTESY LIGHTS
lights are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn state, the cargo and mirror spotter lights will turn off when The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are turned on
the lights off. the vehicle is in motion, but the bed light will remain on. In when any door is opened. The courtesy and dome lights
all states, including California and Mississippi, if a bed are turned on when the Dome On button is pushed on the 2
camera is deactivated, the bed lights will turn back on. overhead console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on
BATTERY SAVER the key fob, the courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights will
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to turn on.
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery. Courtesy/Reading Lights
If the ignition is in the OFF position, the interior lights will
The overhead console lights can also be operated
automatically turn off when:
individually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding
 Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes. buttons.
 The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
 The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manually acti-
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
vated by either the headlight switch or the truck bed
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for switch.
approximately 30 seconds when a key fob unlock button NOTE:
is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the
When these lights are activated using the button on the ON/RUN position.
headlight switch, the cargo lights, trailer spotter lights, and
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
trailer hitch light will remain illuminated when the vehicle
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
will turn off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF
DRIVE. Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE position, the
trailer hitch light will turn on automatically. The trailer hitch 1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
light will turn off when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE 2 — Dome Defeat Button
position. 3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
NOTE:
The rear courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been
turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
headlight switch located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button 1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Dome Defeat Button 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
4 — Dome On Button With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the
NOTE: brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating the
ambient dimmer control will adjust the interior and
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead console, if
ambient light levels when the headlights are on.
both the Dome On and Dome Defeat buttons are pushed,
the Illuminated Entry with door ajar feature will be Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
disabled, but the dome lights inside the vehicle will Dimmer Controls The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be
turn on. dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are available when the parking lights or headlights are on.
for your vehicle: When Display Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect
 Push button on/off system, the brightness will automatically adjust from
daytime intensity to nighttime intensity (and vice versa)
 Push lens on/off
based on ambient light levels outside of the vehicle.
 No on/off button, only courtesy light
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen cannot be
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
adjusted when the instrument panel dimmer control is The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
rotated to the upper most detent, even when Display multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect Settings. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
on the end of the lever. 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the brightness of the
Uconnect touchscreen will adjust to the set brightness Windshield Washers 2
(1 - 6) when the headlights are either on or off. For more To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
information on these Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 226. located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward and
hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wipers will
I LLUMINATED ENTRY operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob released.
to unlock the doors or open any door. If the washer knob is pushed while in the delay range, the
This feature also turns on the approach lamps located wipers will operate for several seconds after the washer
beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped). knob is released. The wipers will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, knob is pushed while in the off position, the wipers will
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch turn on and cycle approximately three times after the
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
washer knob is released.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy 1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
lights will not turn off if the Dome On button on the Short Press For Mist) cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
overhead console is pushed. The overhead and door 2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes to protect information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the Dome WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION WARNING!
Defeat button on the overhead console is pushed.
Intermittent Wipers Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
NOTE: The intermittent feature of this system was designed for lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Approach lights use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
under the outside mirrors, they will also be turned off by with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
pushing the Dome Defeat button. maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob defroster before and during windshield washer use.
upward to the first detent.
Mist NOTE:  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with

When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward briefly and mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain
release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind- Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
shut off.
shield. selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
NOTE:  Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce previously) exist.
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; Rain Sensing performance.
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray  The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off CLIMATE CONTROLS
the windshield with washer fluid. using the Uconnect system Ú page 226.
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
For information on wiper care and replacement, see The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
Ú page 391. wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
following conditions: touchscreen, on the sides of the touchscreen (if
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED  Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first equipped), or on the instrument panel below the radio.
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of five detent positions to
speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
activate this feature.
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
(8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
NEUTRAL position.
wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the O (off) position when not using the system.
Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic

Temperature Controls
A/C Button Auto Button

Press and release this button on the Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
touchscreen, or push the button on the AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
faceplate to change the current setting. temperature by automatically adjusting the
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on. blower speed and air distribution. Air
Recirculation Button Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to 2
improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
Press and release this button on the for efficiency.
touchscreen, or push the button on the You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The  Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate  Push the button on the faceplate.
Temperature Controls when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke,
NOTE: between manual mode and automatic mode Ú page 61.
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be Front Defrost Button
equipment. unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
MAX A/C Button conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the touchscreen, or push and release the
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the button on the faceplate, to change the current
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
touchscreen to change the current setting to airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on.
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
Pressing other settings will also cause MAX A/C to exit. level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
 The MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may mode button, the climate system will return to the
performance. be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging previous setting.
on the inside of the windshield.
 The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Rear Defrost Button the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer Faceplate
temperature settings. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the Push the blue button (or rotate knob if knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
window defroster and the heated outside press and slide the temperature bar towards counterclockwise.
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for Touchscreen
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear cooler temperature settings.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. NOTE: the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
 The numbers within the temperature display will only Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
CAUTION! area between the icons.
appear if the system is equipped with an automatic
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to climate control system.
Mode Control
the heating elements:  Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles
Select Mode by pressing one of the mode
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear equipped with a 12-inch display.
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing the
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the SYNC Button MODE button on the faceplate, to change the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a airflow distribution mode. The airflow
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
with warm water. indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
demist outlets.
synchronizes the passenger temperature
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the Faceplate
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will Push the MODE button to change the airflow distribution
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. automatically exit this feature. mode.
NOTE: Touchscreen
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Press one of the mode buttons to change the airflow
Down Buttons Blower Control distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
Blower Control regulates the amount of air adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
forced through the climate control system.
independent temperature control.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
press and slide the temperature bar towards selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode Mix Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually side window demister outlets. This setting
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes works best in cold or snowy conditions that
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can require extra heat to the windshield. This
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing 2
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air moisture on the windshield.
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
Bi-Level Mode touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets faceplate (if equipped) to turn the Climate Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display Manual
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is Control system on/off. Temperature Controls
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets. MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL MAX A/C Setting
NOTE: DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Set the temperature control knob to the
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to MAX A/C setting to change the current setting
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air to the coldest output of air. Moving the
from the floor outlets. temperature control knob away from the
MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Floor Mode
A/C Button
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost Push the A/C button to engage the Air
and side window demister outlets. Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature Controls

Recirculation Button Rear Defrost Button The temperature increases as you turn the
temperature control knob clockwise.
Push the Recirculation button to change the Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
system between recirculation mode and button to turn on the rear window defroster and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The The temperature decreases as you turn the
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all Blower Control
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be CAUTION!
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on Blower Control regulates the amount of air
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to forced through the climate control system.
manually without disturbing the mode control selection. the heating elements: There are seven blower speeds available. The
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make  Use care when washing the inside of the rear blower speed increases as you turn the blower
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating knob counterclockwise.
On vehicles equipped with Manual Climate controls, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking Mode Control
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is with warm water.
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive distribution. The airflow distribution mode can
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in window cleaners on the interior surface of the be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
the control button to blink and then turn off. window. panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
Front Defrost Setting  Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
demist outlets.
Turn the mode control knob to the Front Panel Mode
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
windshield and side window demist outlets. Temperature Control
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
When the defrost button is selected, the blower Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum forced through the climate system. of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
temperature settings for best windshield and side window be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
defrosting and defogging. direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION —
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets passenger temperature control buttons. Once the I F E QUIPPED
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is desired temperature is displayed, the system will
directed through the defrost and side window Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
demister outlets. everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
level.
NOTE: 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, 2
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to say one of the following commands:
not necessary to change the settings. You will
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
from the floor outlets. the system to function automatically.  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Floor Mode NOTE: Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight  It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
amount of air is directed through the defrost cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
and side window demister outlets. the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide or steering wheel if equipped.
comfort as quickly as possible.
Mix Mode OPERATING T IPS
 The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-program- Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
side window demister outlets. This setting mable feature within the Uconnect Settings control settings for various weather conditions.
works best in cold or snowy conditions that Ú page 226.
require extra heat to the windshield. This
Summer Operation
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic The engine cooling system must be protected with a
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
moisture on the windshield.
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in protection and to protect against engine overheating.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL speed and transition into Auto mode. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
(ATC) Manual Operation Override Winter Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
Automatic Operation features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the turned off when the system is being used in the manual functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic mode. concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of STORAGE
time, see Ú page 433. Set the mode control to
Glove Compartment
Window Fogging Hot Weather And (Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, Vehicle Interior Is blower on high. Roll down the
of the instrument panel and features both an upper and
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Very Hot windows for a minute to flush out
lower storage area.
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. the hot air. Adjust the controls as
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long needed to achieve comfort.
periods, as fogging may occur.
Turn (A/C) on and set the
Outside Air Intake Warm Weather
mode control to (Panel
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the Mode).
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear Set the mode control to (Mix
Cool & Humid
of ice, slush, and snow. Conditions Mode) and turn (A/C) on to
Cabin Air Filter keep windows clear.
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen Set the mode control to Glove Compartment
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your (Floor Mode). If windshield 1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. Cold Weather
fogging starts to occur, move the (If Equipped)
control to (Mix Mode). 2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove compartment, Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
push the release button to open. the cover.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
WARNING!
2
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
Door Storage Center Storage Compartment

Front Door Storage — If Equipped
WARNING!
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels. Center Storage Compartment
 This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped 1 — Upper Console Handle
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and operation, or a collision. 2 — Lower Console Handle
passenger rear door trim panels.
 In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight of
Center Storage Compartment — the items stored exceeds about 10 lb (4.5 kg). These
If Equipped items could be thrown about endangering occupants
of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a total
The center storage compartment is located between the of 10 lb (4.5 kg).
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both an upper and lower
storage area.
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to open the Premium Center Console — If Equipped
lower storage bin. The lower bin contains a power inverter. The premium center console is equipped with two front
There is also a fill line located along the rear inside wall of storage bins located in front of the center storage
the lower bin. Contents above the fill line may interfere compartment. These storage bins may be equipped with
with cupholder placement if equipped with a premium tandem doors. Push the front bin to access the
center console. cupholders, or push the rear bin to access the coin holder/
small storage bin.
Tandem Doors Open Position

1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
Push the release button at the front of the cupholder bin

to slide tray rearward to access the front lower storage bin,
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin or forward to access the rear lower storage bin.
1 — Wireless Charging Pad Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
2 — Power Inverter 1 — Push Front Bin Access
3 — Storage Area 2 — Push Rear Bin Access
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray

Overhead Sunglass Storage Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped Seatback Storage — If Equipped
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, storage Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses. can be found by folding down the center seatback. seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the A console storage area and cupholders are available.
compartment.
2
Seatback Storage
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
Overhead Sunglass Door With the seatback in the upright position, lift the center
seat bottom to access additional storage underneath
the seat.
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
If Equipped Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row with a folding load floor.
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for WARNING!
cleaning. Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
Opened Storage Bin in serious or fatal injury.
Storage Bin (Regular Cab) Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab

The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
the length of the cab.
position.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch

To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor mat
(if equipped), and lift upward on the handle of the latch
and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open
the lid.
Storage Bin
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps. Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under The 4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in
Seat the secured down position before you operate the
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward vehicle.
position. Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the load floor. the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage 2
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load compartment.
floor. If equipped with a fold flat load floor, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
WARNING! on the fold flat lid to open the storage compartments
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position. When Ú page 66.
stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor could
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position move to the down position causing serious injury.
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
Crew Cab Storage
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab

Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the instrument
panel, is the main media hub. There are four total USB
ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs
(Type A). There is also an AUX port located in the middle of
the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual. Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
NOTE: 1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1 1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and both
2 — AUX Port 2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can
transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear 3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
and allow you to select the device transferring data. Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port The third and fourth USB ports are located behind the and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display radios: different
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a center console, above the power inverter. These USB ports scenarios are listed as follows when a non-phone device is
message will appear and allow you to select which device are charge only. plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports, and when a
to use. phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB
ports:
 “A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
 “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
NOTE: If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two Standard ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port may be located to the
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media left of the center stack, just below the climate controls. The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can provide
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
the device is not supported by the system. standard “cigar lighter” style plug. The 12 Volt power
outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB port (Charge Only) have
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12 V DC”, together 2
with either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
If equipped, there is also a charge-only USB port located in
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/
the center console of the vehicle.
RUN or ACC position for the outlet to provide power. The
battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to
the battery, and can provide power at all times.
CAUTION!
 Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
USB/AUX Media Hub
(13 Amp) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports will need to be replaced.
3 — AUX Port  Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
Some USB ports support media and charging. You can use this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Center Console Charge-Only USB Port Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android Auto™,
Pandora®, and others while charging your phone. not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or visit UconnectPhone.com.
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray on top of

WARNING! POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
the center stack. This power outlet works when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF position. To avoid serious injury or death: Interior Power Inverters
 Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet If equipped, 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power inverters
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. may be located inside the vehicle. These inverters can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low power
 Do not touch with wet hands. devices requiring power up to 400 W. Certain video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. All power inverters are designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
shock and failure. been removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
The front power inverter is located in center console
toward the right hand side, just under the Wireless
CAUTION! Charging Pad (if equipped).
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
Power Outlet Fuse Locations: from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear Center cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
Console enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
 F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet
engine from starting.
Battery Fed (If Equipped)
 F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
Ignition Fed (If Equipped) vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
 F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument Panel tently and with greater caution.
Power Outlet (If Equipped)
 After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces- Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed There is also a second 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the inverter located on the rear of the center console.
recharge the vehicle's battery.
battery against discharge.
Exterior Power Inverter — If Equipped

Vehicles not equipped with a RamBox may be equipped
with a 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power inverter located
just inside the truck bed.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped) Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
NOTE: For information on the outlet found inside the RamBox,
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. see Ú page 82.
If three outlets are in use, 400 W is shared among the To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device.
devices plugged in. The outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
Exterior Power Inverter (If Equipped)
If equipped with a front bench seat, the inverter is located NOTE:
to the right of the center stack, just below the climate The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only found
controls. on vehicles equipped with an exterior power inverter. The  The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is in the
switch only controls on/off operation of the power outlet in ACC or ON/RUN position.
the truck bed or, if equipped, the RamBox. It does not  Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
control on/off operation of the power outlets located shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.
inside the cabin of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
Center Stack Power Inverter (If Equipped) shock and failure.
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — LED Indicator Status: instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
 No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device. of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
I F EQUIPPED ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
 Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging. with the wireless charging pad. This may just be a
 Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless CAUTION!
Charging Pad: The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START position or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
and all vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
charging pad to operate. the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
 Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
vehicle from starting.
connected to a wired charger.
 The phone’s protective case must be removed when
Wireless Charging Pad placed on the wireless charging pad. WINDOWS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 W (3 Amp) Qi  iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
wireless charging pad located inside of the center console. ware to protect the device from overheating. When the POWER W INDOWS
This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi software is active, the rate of charge is slowed down to
protect the device. The window controls on the driver's door control all the
enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses
door windows.
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile  Phones must always be placed on the wireless
device. charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile  Having multiple applications open on the phone while
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information. even shut down an application that is actively running
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip (i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also cause the phone to
mat to hold your mobile phone in place and an LED overheat.
indicator light.  Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by To stop the window from going all the way down during the RESET AUTO-U P
using the single window controls on the passenger door Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the briefly. Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
To open the window part way (manually), push the window Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
switch down briefly and release. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
will go up automatically.
additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2
NOTE: To stop the window from going all the way up during the
The power window switches will remain active for up to Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. window completely and continue to hold the switch
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly down for an additional two seconds after the window
The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings and release it when you want the window to stop. is fully open.
Ú page 226. If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH
WARNING! obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
window.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location NOTE: passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the and release the window lockout button (the indicator light
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If on the button will turn on). To enable the window controls,
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the push and release the window lockout button again (the
become entrapped by the windows while operating the window manually. indicator light on the button will turn off).
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death. WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
Auto-Down Feature window path before closing.
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
Window Lockout Switch

POWER S LIDING REAR WINDOW — This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
WARNING!
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the
IF EQUIPPED front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
the overhead console. Push the switch rearward to open
window. to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
the glass. Pull the switch forward to close the glass.
Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
The power sunroof switches are located on the overhead
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
 Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
MANUAL S LIDING R EAR WINDOW —
I F EQUIPPED
Opening Sunroof
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
Express Open/Close
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Power Sunroof Switches To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof switch
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
WIND B UFFETING 2 — Venting Sunroof
open automatically from any position and stop at full
open.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain close automatically from any position.
open or partially open positions.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any Sunshade Operation

other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Manual Open/Close sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the sunroof NOTE:
switch. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the sunroof 2
switch.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
cancel this feature.
held again. Hood Release
NOTE:
NOTE: 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the Uconnect
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express or hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to
system Ú page 226.
Manual Open operation is initiated, the sunshade will release it, before raising the hood.
automatically open with the sunroof. Sunroof Maintenance
Express Venting Sunroof Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
To vent open the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
release within one-half second. To close the sunroof from debris that may have collected in the tracks.
the vent position, push DOWN on the vent switch and
release within one-half second. HOOD
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of
TO OPEN THE H OOD
the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an To open the hood, two latches must be released.
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
if this occurs. Safety Latch Location
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
NOTE:
TAILGATE TAILGATE REMOVAL
 Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
NOTE:
be in PARK. OPENING Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera
 While lifting the hood, use both hands. function.
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate
 Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are release pad located on the tailgate door. To remove the tailgate, refer to the following instructions:
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to the 1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera
TO CLOSE THE H OOD open position (if equipped). and or power locks (if equipped) Ú page 77.
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped 2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the by releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
The key fob may be equipped with an electronic
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer release feature for the tailgate, allowing NOTE:
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its hands-free tailgate opening. To activate, push Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support
own inertia. and release the Tailgate Release button on the cables.
key fob twice within five seconds. The tailgate door will
WARNING! unlatch, and slowly lower into the open position.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your If equipped, a button on the center overhead console
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open inside the vehicle can be used to release the tailgate. An
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. indicator light may also signal when the tailgate is open.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be stationary
injury or death. and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 86 may
CAUTION! prevent electronic tailgate release. The Tonneau Cover
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to must be removed or folded up before releasing the
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of tailgate. Locking Tang
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
CLOSING 3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
latched. After closing the tailgate, pull it back to be sure it
is latched securely.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock button.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side 2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by 4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
pivot. pushing inward in the locking tab. glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle. and insert the bracket back into the sill.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
2
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And Locking Tab

Remote Keyless Entry Chassis Wiring Harness
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket located on
the rear sill.
Chassis Plug
Disconnected Harness
Connector Bracket
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove

compartment) to the tailgate wiring harness to
ensure that the terminals do not corrode.
Taped Tailgate Harness Bed Step Components
BED STEP — I F E QUIPPED 1 — Bed Step

2 — Foot Tab
Wire Harness Bracket Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable bed
step on the driver’s side of the tailgate to provide easier
1 — Tailgate Plug Release entry and exit into the truck bed. To extend the bed step, place your foot on the protruding
2 — Tailgate Plug foot tab located on the left edge of the bed step, and push
rearward. A small amount of force will release the spring
3 — Tailgate Harness
load, and extend the bed step out and away from the
tailgate.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will
prevent damaging the connector and bracket when
storing or reinstalling the tailgate.
Bed Step Location

NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will extend
PICKUP BOX WARNING!
out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position that will avoid The pickup box has many features designed for utility and  The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes
coming into contact with the step as it extends. convenience. only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
 Care should always be exercised when operating a 2
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
 If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse,
Bed Step (Extended) Pickup Box Features supports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push the bed 1 — Cleats may result. The use of proper supports will permit
step forward with your foot until the bed step is retracted 2 — Upper Load Floor Indents loading up to the rated payload.
by the spring load.
3 — Bulk Head Dividers  Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
4 — Anchors accident causing serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your hands.
The low clearance space between the bed step and the NOTE: There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
rear bumper as the bed step returns to the stowed If you are installing a toolbox, ladder rack or headache bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
position could result in injury to your hands or fingers. rack at the front of the pickup box, you must use Mopar® housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available from an to side to create separate load compartments in the
authorized dealer. pickup box.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1,000 lb
the box in the indentations provided above the wheel (450 kg) total.
housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
CARGO CAMERA — IF E QUIPPED Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available With Deactivation
Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is
allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box. Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of deactivated. It can also be manually deactivated through
The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen. the pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or the Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center
NOTE:
the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). of the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
A touchscreen button to indicate the and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an the Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously
current active camera image being approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed. until the touchscreen X button to disable display of the
displayed is made available whenever Cargo Camera image is pressed.
the Cargo Camera image is displayed. Activation
 The touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
A touchscreen button to switch the The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through
camera image is made available ONLY when the
display to rear view camera image the Uconnect Settings by pressing the Cargo Camera
vehicle is not in reverse.
is made available whenever the button, followed by the Adjust Centerline button on the
touchscreen.  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
Cargo Camera image is displayed.
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
will display anytime the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the camera
Adjusting Centerline Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off —
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Refer to the following steps to manually adjust the With Uconnect 5/5 NAV
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image centerline: 1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until 1. Press the Adjust Centerline button located in the the Uconnect display.
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display. 2. Press the Cargo Camera button to turn the
speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen Cargo Camera system on.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
X button to disable display of the Cargo Camera image is
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally NOTE:
pressed.
or vertically. Once initiated by the Cargo Camera button, the Cargo
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the Camera image will be displayed until the vehicle speed
Accept button to set the centerline to the newly remains below 8 mph (13 km/h) and the 10 second timer
specified position. runs out. The image may be deactivated by pressing the
touchscreen X button, placing the ignition in the OFF
position, placing the gear selector in PARK, or pressing the
touchscreen X button. On deactivation, the previous
selected screen will appear.
BED RAIL T IE-D OWN SYSTEM — Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
I F EQUIPPED properly secure. cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the
CAUTION! counterclockwise several turns. Then pull out on the cleat cleat off the end of the rail.
and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location.
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lb
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten 2
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
the nut.
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
NOTE:
This feature is only available for vehicles equipped with a
RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Adjustable Cleat Assembly

1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Adjustable Cleats
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)

Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the release
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
button located beneath the end cap while pulling the cap The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
away from the rail. The cleat can now be removed by and cargo management system consisting of up to box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
sliding it off the end of the rail. three features: illuminated storage for up to 300 lb (136 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
 Integrated box side storage bins
 Cargo divider (if equipped)
 Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped) Ú page 81
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX

Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
Ú page 17. The RamBox storage bins can be locked using
the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert
the key into the keyhole on the push button and turn
clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover return the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button. RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
CAUTION! CAUTION!
 Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before Failure to follow the following items could cause
moving or driving vehicle. damage to the vehicle:
 Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be  Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/ properly secured.
hinging mechanisms.  Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lb (136 kg)
 Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/ for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles per bin.
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage, To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push
Pull End Cap Away From Rail secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully
appropriate padding. open.
NOTE: NOTE:
The RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if the Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and
RamBox is locked. shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 W maximum) inverter may be
located inside the RamBox of your vehicle. The inverter
can be turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter
2
switch located to the left of the steering wheel. The
RamBox inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
RamBox Light Switch will most power tools.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove a plug, pull up on
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock the edge. To install, push the plug downward into the
drain hole.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could
cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid is
required to stay open for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
RamBox Power Inverter
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination, there is a manual on/off switch located at the
rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch once will turn
off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will turn the RamBox Drain Plug Removal
lights back on.
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only found RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING RamBox Emergency Release Lever
on vehicles equipped with an exterior power inverter
inside the RamBox or truck bed. The switch only controls As a security measure, an Emergency Release Lever is
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
on/off operation of the exterior power inverter; it does not built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
injury or damage to your vehicle:
control on/off operation of the power outlets located In the event of an individual being locked inside the
inside the cabin of the vehicle. WARNING! storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
 Always close the storage bin covers when your attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
vehicle is unattended.
 Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may not
be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
 In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
 Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch  Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
Emergency Release Lever
 Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED

The bed divider has two functional positions:
 Divider Position
 Storage Position
Divider Position 2
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo. Center Handle And Lock Aligning Gate To Slots
To install the bed divider into a divider position, perform 1 — Center Handle Lock 3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard
the following: 2 — Handle ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the 3 — Unlocked Position 4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to 4 — Locked Position side gates in the closed position.
release the divider side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the divider so the

outboard ends align with the intended slots in the
sides of the bed.
Side Gates Closed

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position, perform
the same steps as you would for the divider position,
except position the divider fully forward in the bed against
the front panel.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop Location Of Rear Latches

NOTE:
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck 2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the Tonneau
bed to protect your gear and cargo. Cover’s rear panel.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER R EMOVAL

To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following steps:
Storage Position 1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the underside of
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of the
the cover.
cargo tie-down loops.
Released Position
3. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the

Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper
upward. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the
clamp has been stowed properly.
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position) Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is
in this position.
Stowed Position 5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the front
panel (Tri-Folded Position).
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp wire
are in the proper stowed position. If the clamp and
clamp wire are not properly stowed, damage to the
Tonneau Cover material will result.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together

4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(Intermediate Position). NOTE:
 When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Tri-Folded Position  Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the Tonneau NOTE:

Cover panels from unfolding. Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely,
and the stowage straps are engaged, before removing the
CAUTION! cover from the vehicle.
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by both TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER
front latches and both front stowage straps or damage
to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may occur. I NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed
and push the cover forward against the front of the
Released Position truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when
placed on the vehicle.
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper NOTE:
upward. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all the way
clamp has been properly stowed. forward on the truck bed. Failure to do so might prevent
proper clamp engagement, or interfere with the electronic
tailgate release function (if equipped).
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded Position, pull both front clamp
handles down to the Released Position.
Stowed Position
9. Utilizing two people, remove the Tonneau Cover. Location Of Front Latches
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release 4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position 5. Disengage the stowage straps.
the clamps from the Stowed Position. to properly engage the clamps. 6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the Intermediate
Position.
Stowed Position Clamped Position

3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of the box NOTE: Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
(or flange of the RamBox rail, if equipped) to the Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not improperly NOTE:
Semi-Clamped Position. attached to the truck bed flange. When folding the center and rear panels, the sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover
material.
Semi Clamped Position Improper Clamp Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage

8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the Released

Position.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Semi Clamped Position

7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover. 10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position
Stowed Position to properly engage the clamps.
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box

(or flange of RamBox rail, if equipped) to the Semi
Clamped Position.
Fully Unfolded Position

Clamped Position
WARNING! TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER C LEANING

You must ensure the Tonneau Cover is properly For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar®
installed on the vehicle before driving. An unsecured Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar® Leather & Vinyl
Tonneau Cover can fly off of the vehicle while in motion, Conditioner/Protectant.
resulting in a collision, personal injury, and death.
Failure to follow this procedure can also damage the 2
vehicle and the Tonneau Cover.
CAUTION!
Improper Clamp Position
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
NOTE: Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
clamped to the truck bed flange. Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
Locking Hole
92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4. Oil Pressure Gauge

WARNING!
 The pointer should always indicate the oil pres-
DESCRIPTIONS — GAS E NGINE sure when the engine is running. A continuous A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
Use this QR code to access your digital high or low reading under normal driving condi- could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
experience. tions may indicate a lubrication system malfunc- recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
tion. Immediate service should be obtained from your vehicle overheats Ú page 396.
1. Tachometer
 Indicates the engine speed in
5. Speedometer
revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).  Indicates vehicle speed.
CAUTION! 3
6. Temperature Gauge Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
2. Voltmeter
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the gauge  The gauge pointer shows engine coolant tempera- over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
indicates the electrical system voltage. The ture. The pointer positioned within the normal conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
pointer should stay within the normal range if the range indicates that the engine cooling system is the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
battery is charged. If the pointer moves to either operating satisfactorily. turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
extreme left or right and remains there during  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher dealer for service.
normal driving, the electrical system should be temperature when driving in hot weather, up
serviced. mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
7. Fuel Gauge
3. Instrument Cluster Display should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this display when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 104.  The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
 The display always shows one of the main menu is located.
item after ignition is placed on.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE

HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
 The gauge pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
DESCRIPTIONS — GAS E NGINE ture. The pointer positioned within the normal Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
1. Tachometer range indicates that the engine cooling system is your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
operating satisfactorily. over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
minute (RPM x 1000).  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
2. Instrument Cluster Display turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
dealer for service.
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this display should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits 3
shows the instrument cluster display messages of the normal operating range.
Ú page 104. 5. Fuel Gauge
 The display always shows one of the main menu WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
item after ignition is placed on. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
3. Speedometer could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is  The fuel pump symbol points to the
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if side of the vehicle where the fuel door
 Indicates vehicle speed.
your vehicle overheats Ú page 396. is located.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER CAUTION!

4. Tachometer
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage minute (RPM x 1000).
1. Temperature Gauge your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
5. Instrument Cluster Display
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
 The temperature gauge shows engine coolant conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into  The instrument cluster display features a driver
temperature. Any reading within 203°F - 230°F the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” interactive display Ú page 104.
(95°C - 110°C) indicates that the engine cooling turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
system is operating satisfactorily. NOTE:
dealer for service.
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the 3
ignition is first cycled.
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
2. Speedometer
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal  Indicates vehicle speed.
operating range. 3. Fuel Gauge
WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others ON/RUN position.
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is  The fuel pump symbol points to the
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if side of the vehicle where the fuel door
your vehicle overheats Ú page 396. is located.
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE

MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CAUTION!

6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to
1. Tachometer your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads greater maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge,
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
minute (RPM x 1000). back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is
2. Engine Coolant Temperature the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an available in the instrument cluster display section
authorized dealer for service.
 This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera- under the heading of DEF Warning Messages.
3
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher NOTE:
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up 3. Instrument Cluster Display • The gauge may take up to five seconds to
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go traffic.
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this display update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
If the red Warning Light turns on while driving,
shows the instrument cluster display messages the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and turn off the DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle until the Ú page 104.
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
cause is corrected.  The display always shows one of the main menu • The DEF gauge may also not immediately
item after ignition is placed on. update after a refill if the temperature of the
WARNING! 4. Oil Pressure Gauge DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
 The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-
gauge to update after a period of run time.
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is sure when the engine is running. A continuous Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if high or low reading under normal driving condi- the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
your vehicle overheats. tions may indicate a lubrication system malfunc- several drives.
tion. Immediate service should be obtained from
7. Fuel Gauge
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
5. Speedometer
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
 Indicates vehicle speed. tion.
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE

HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge • The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
1. Tachometer maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge,
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per • The DEF gauge may also not immediately
a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
minute (RPM x 1000). update after a refill if the temperature of the
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
2. Instrument Cluster Display available in the instrument cluster display section heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this display under the heading of DEF Warning Messages. gauge to update after a period of run time. 3
shows the instrument cluster display messages NOTE: Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
Ú page 104. the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with several drives.
 The display always shows one of the main menu a large amount of full reserve. So the level
item after ignition is placed on. sensor will indicate a full reading even before 5. Fuel Gauge
3. Speedometer the tank is completely full. To put it another  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
way, there’s additional storage capacity in the when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
 Indicates vehicle speed. tank above the Full mark that’s not represented tion.
in the gauge. You may not see any movement in
the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles  The fuel pump symbol points to the
(322 kilometers) in some cases. side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER Under very cold conditions, it is possible that

the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
Using a driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL several drives. show you how systems are working and give you warnings
2. Speedometer when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
1. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
allow you to scroll through the main menus and
 Indicates vehicle speed.
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel submenus. You can access the specific information you
Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to 3. Fuel Gauge want and make selections and adjustments.
maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge, when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY
a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is
ON/RUN position. L OCATION AND C ONTROLS
available in the instrument cluster display section  The fuel pump symbol points to the
under the heading of DEF Warning Messages. side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with 4. Tachometer
a large amount of full reserve. So the level  Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
sensor will indicate a full reading even before minute (RPM x 1000).
the tank is completely full. To put it another
way, there’s additional storage capacity in the 5. Instrument Cluster Display
tank above the Full mark that’s not represented  The instrument cluster display features a driver
in the gauge. You may not see any movement in interactive display Ú page 104.
the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles
(322 kilometers) in some cases. NOTE:
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to ignition is first cycled.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
update after a refill if the temperature of the display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
gauge to update after a period of run time. or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features.
The system allows the driver to select information by NOTE:

pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel.  Holding the up / down or left / right arrow
button will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
 Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
 Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed. 3
OK Button:
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons For Digital Speedometer:

 Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button Menu Button
Base/Midline Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 3 — Right Arrow Button  Press Menu button for Home Screen display.
1 — Left Arrow Button 4 — Down Arrow Button  Navigate left or right to highlight desired tile.
2 — Up Arrow Button 5 — OK Button Press OK to select desired. Once OK is pressed, cluster
3 — Right Arrow Button 6 — Menu Button will navigate to selected submenu (e.g. “Audio”).
4 — Down Arrow Button NOTE:
5 — OK Button Exiting Home Screen Speed Limit tile and Navigation tile
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
with no Ethernet navigates to Speedometer submenu.
Using the up or down arrow button allows you to
 Press up or down to select different screen
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
within selected category.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:  If Menu button is pressed while in this view, cluster will
return to previously displayed screen.
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.  Press and hold OK button to enter edit mode.
 Instruction text may overlay lower tachometer
For Screen Setup:  The main menu options of the home screen are Driver  Oil Pressure
 OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. Info, Vehicle Info, Navigation — If Equipped, Audio, and  Battery Voltage
Off Road
 Within each submenu layer, the up and down  Oil Life
arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of  Tire Pressure
interest.  Fuel Economy
 Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a  Air Suspension
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the first page of the submenu).  Driver Info
 Driver Assist
 Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.  Audio
 Audio Info
Custom Tile Configuration — If Equipped
 Off Road
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are able
to select up to five tiles to display information based on  Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
Custom Tile Screen Example
your needs.  Steering Angle
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with up
 Press the MENU button for the Home Screen display  Pitch
to five tiles that may consist of the following:
 Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired tile NOTE:  Roll
 Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the selected These options may vary based on your vehicle trim level.  Trailer Tow
submenu and press OK again to add your selection to  Navigation  Trailer Trip
your tile view
 Route Set / Route Not Set  Trailer Brake
 Trip A / Trip B  Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
 Vehicle Info
 Coolant Temp
 Trans Temp
 Oil Temp
OIL L IFE R ESET 4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select Speedometer
“Reset”.
Use this QR code to access your digital Push and release the up or down arrow button until
experience. 5. Push and release the down arrow button to select the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the
Your vehicle is equipped with an “Yes,” then push and release the right arrow instrument cluster display. Push and release the right
engine oil change indicator system. button to reset the Oil Life to 100%. arrow button to cycle the display between mph and km/h.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster 6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the Driver Assist — If Equipped
instrument cluster display screen. The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the Adaptive
display after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense systems. 3
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Push and release the up or down arrow button until
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). cluster display.
your personal driving style.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
NOTE:
within ten seconds. The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure. 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE system settings. The information displayed depends on
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the ACC system status.
Oil Life Reset Procedure
OFF position. Push the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
NOTE: wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the cluster display:
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. Adaptive Cruise Control Off
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll If necessary, repeat this procedure.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to Push and release the up or down arrow button until
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
select “Oil Life.” the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
instrument cluster display.
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET MIDLINE OR HIGHLINE CLUSTER  Gauge Summary

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the  Tire Pressure Monitor System  Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
instrument cluster Ú page 117.  Battery Voltage — If Equipped
 Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity  Trans Temperature
 Trans Temperature — If Equipped
occurs, which may include any of the following:
 Oil Temperature  Oil Summary
 Distance Setting Change
 Oil Pressure  Oil Temperature
 System Cancel
 Exhaust Brake — If Equipped  Oil Life
 Driver Override
 Boost Pressure — If Equipped  Oil Pressure — If Equipped
 System Off
 Diesel Particulate Filter  Tire Pressure Monitor System
 ACC Proximity Warning
 Oil Life  Diesel Summary
 ACC Unavailable Warning
 Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped  Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
LaneSense — If Equipped
 Battery Voltage — If Equipped  Boost Pressure — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information displayed  Gauge Summary — If Equipped  Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions  Coolant Temp  Engine Hours — If Equipped
that need to be met.
 Trans Temp Off Road
Vehicle Info  Oil Temp Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Push and release the up or down arrow button until  Oil Pressure the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument
the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument  Engine Hours — If Equipped cluster display. Push and release the left or right
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the PREMIUM CLUSTER  Drivetrain
directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
 Fuel Economy  Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
Vehicle Info submenu items:
 Average numerical value of calculated average front wheel
angle from the steering wheel orientation.
 Current
 Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
 Range to Empty
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
 Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):  Elapsed Time value will be displayed in red, and the affected low tire
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text Push and hold the right arrow button to reset all on the center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display
message (connected or disconnected). information. screen.
 Pitch And Roll Navigation — If Equipped Audio
 Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the Push and release the up or down arrow button until Push and release the up or down arrow button until
graphic with the angle number on the screen. the Navigation display title is highlighted in the instrument the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
NOTE: cluster display, “Hold OK to Start Route” will display when cluster display. This menu will display the audio source
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch no active route is set. “Hold OK to Cancel Route” will information, including the Song name, Artist name, and
3
and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the display when active route is set. Use the left or right audio source with an accompanying graphic.
graphic will be grayed out. A message indicating the arrow button to zoom in or out on the display Ú page 226. Phone Call Status
necessary speed for the feature to become available will
also display. Trailer Tow When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
Fuel Economy — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until phone is answered or ignored.
the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
Push and release the up or down arrow button until NOTE:
the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the cluster display. Push and release the right or left The call status will temporarily replace the previous media
arrow button to cycle through the following trailer tow source information displayed on the screen. When the
instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the right information:
arrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy. pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the
 Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the last used screen.
 Current Fuel Economy Gauge OK button to reset the distance.
 Average Fuel Economy Value
Messages
 Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
 Range To Empty  Braking Output Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
Trip A/Trip B  Trailer Type shows the number of stored warning messages. Push and
Push and release the up or down arrow button until  ITBM Gain release the right or left arrow button to cycle
the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster  Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK button to through stored messages.
display. Push and release the right arrow button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence Ú page 215.
enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip  Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument
B information will display the following: Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pressure for
 Distance a connected trailer with sensors that match the active
trailer profile. When a low tire is present, the low tire
 Average Fuel Economy
Settings — If Equipped Upper Center Favorite Menus

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall None Compass Outside Temp Speedometer Vehicle Info Driver Assist
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Time Range To Empty Average Econ Trailer Tow –
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Fuel Economy Trip Info If Equipped
Current Econ Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Settings displays in the instrument cluster display. (show/hide)
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Audio
Trailer Trip Speedometer Audio
Vehicle Settings. (show/hide) Messages Screen Setup
(show/hide)
NOTE: Menu TItle
Commercial
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings. Settings
 If equipped with a base radio (non-touchscreen), Left or Right
Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument
None Range To Empty Average Econ Current Gear
cluster display.
 Off
 If equipped with a touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Menu Icon Coolant Temp Oil Temp
Settings will be included in the radio head unit.  On
Fuel Filter Life –
Trans Temp Oil Life Odometer
If Equipped
MIDLINE OR HIGHLINE CLUSTER
 No Decimal Point
Upper Left or Right  Decimal Point
Lower Left or Right
None Time Current Econ Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range Trip A Distance  Cancel
Compass Range Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance  Restore
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
Trailer Brake Oil Pressure Trailer Trip –
If Equipped Trailer Brake Oil Pressure
If Equipped
Coolant Temp Oil Temp Battery Voltage
Coolant Temp Oil Temp Battery Voltage
Exhaust Brake –
Trans Temp Oil Life Exhaust Brake –
If Equipped Trans Temp Oil Life
If Equipped
Boost Pressure – Fuel Filter Life –
Boost Pressure – Fuel Filter Life –
If Equipped If Equipped
If Equipped If Equipped
PREMIUM CLUSTER Fuel Gauge NOTE:

 Hide Range If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an autho-
Display Style
rized dealer to have the PIN reset. If the PIN is known, you
 Modern  Show Range may enter the PIN and restore to the factory settings.
 Traditional The Default PIN will be “0000”.
Favorite Menus
Upper Left or Right Trip Info Navigation Off Road DIESEL M ESSAGES AND WARNINGS —
None Time Current Econ Trailer Tow –
Audio
6.7L CUMMINS® DIESEL E NGINE
Compass Range Trip A Distance
If Equipped
(show/hide) Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages 3
(show/hide)
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance The Cummins® diesel engine meets all diesel emissions
Trailer Trip – standards, resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
If Equipped engines ever produced. To achieve these emissions
 Restore standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art
 Cancel engine and exhaust system. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by
Upper Center Commercial Settings — If Equipped the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages
None Badge Compass Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and recall engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
Outside Temp Time Range To Empty additional features when the transmission is in PARK (P). to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with
no input or interaction on your part.
Average Econ Current Econ Trip A Distance Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Audio Commercial Settings displays in the instrument cluster WARNING!
Trip B Distance Trailer Trip display.
(show/hide)
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and enter the
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
Commercial Settings submenu.
Current Gear This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
Commercial Settings allows you to access the following flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
 Off
features (if equipped): cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
 On injury to the driver, occupants or others.
 Backup Alarm
Odometer
 ParkSense
 No Decimal Point
 Aux Switches
 Decimal Point
 PIN Setup
 Hide
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as  Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer — This
maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. The little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the condition in message indicates the PCM has derated the engine to
following messages may display in your instrument cluster the particulate filter system and allow your Cummins® limit the likelihood of permanent damage to the
display: diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system to after-treatment system. If this condition is not
 Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emissions remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM) and corrected and a dealer service is not performed, exten-
maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you when restore the system to normal operating condition. sive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To
this maintenance is due, the instrument cluster display  Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process Exhaust correct this condition it will be necessary to have your
will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF is self-cleaning. vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
Service” message is displayed in the instrument Maintain your current driving condition until regenera- NOTE:
cluster display it is necessary to have the emissions tion is completed. Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may  Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — This and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles
include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
(CCV) filter element. The procedure for clearing and completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
resetting the "Perform Service" indicator message is one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine
located in the appropriate Service Information. power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct
 Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now — This
 Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now — this condition.
message indicates regeneration has been disabled
"Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds due to a system malfunction. At this point the engine
to Remedy" will be displayed in the instrument cluster CAUTION!
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) will register a fault
display if the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of code, the instrument panel will display a MIL light. See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
its maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of system could occur soon with continued operation.
exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, CAUTION!
your Cummins® diesel engine and exhaust after-treat-
ment system may never reach the conditions required See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). If this system could occur soon with continued operation.
occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning  5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Refill
DEF — This message will continuously display when the
The vehicle will display messages when a derate (engine Messages counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a
power reduction) is activated to protect the engine during There are four different messages which are displayed if periodic chime.
start-up in cold ambient temperatures. the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of
 Engine Power Reduced During Warm-up — This with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component 5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to
message will display during start-up when the failures, or when tampering has been detected. The occur:
ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C) and vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
-10°F (-23°C). (8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than  If the vehicle is shut off and restarted.
 Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds) During 200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.  If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of 3
Warm-up — This message will display during start-up When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following time, approximately one hour or greater.
when the ambient temperature is between -10°F warnings will display:  If the system detects that the level of fuel in the
(-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C).  DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display when tank has increased.
 Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes) During the low level is reached, during vehicle start-up, and Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF to the
Warm-up — This message will display during start-up with increased frequency during vehicle operation. It tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at a maximum
when the ambient temperature is -25°F (-32°C) and will be accompanied by a single chime. Approximately speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
below. 5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm up when this message is initially displayed. on pickup A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be required to
protection feature that may limit engine performance applications, and approximately 7 gallons (26 Liters) restore normal vehicle operation. Although the vehicle will
after cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The are required on chassis-cab applications. start normally and can be placed in gear after this
length of time engine speed is limited is dependent  Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — This message has been initially displayed, extreme caution
upon engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may message will continuously display if the “DEF Low Refill should be utilized since the vehicle will only be capable of
be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with Soon” message is ignored, and the frequency of occur- maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
coolant temperature below freezing conditions, and rence of the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons
may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approximately (7.5 Liters) of DEF is added to the tank.
two minutes under more severe cold conditions.
 Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low Ú page 381.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning of less than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the value BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER
where it stopped when a previous fault was temporarily
Messages remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km). MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
There are five different messages which are displayed if
the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled
 5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
Service DEF See Dealer — This message will continu-
with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component ously display when the mileage counter reaches zero, This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
failures, or when tampering has been detected. The and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph system and status of the vehicle battery.
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of
5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
occur: the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
warnings will display:  If the vehicle is shut off and restarted.
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
 Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will  If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
display when the fault is initially detected, each time time, approximately one hour or greater.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving.  If the system detects that the level of fuel in the It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
The message will be accompanied by a single chime. tank has increased. depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized  5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See Dealer — lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as This message will continuously display, and will be drive cycle.
possible. accompanied by a periodic chime. Although the vehicle When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
 5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF System See can be started and placed in gear, the vehicle will only Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
Dealer — This message will display if the DEF system operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph. Your vehicle will appear in the instrument cluster.
has not been serviced after the “Service DEF System – require towing, see an authorized dealer for service.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
See Dealer” message is displayed. This message will NOTE: state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
continuously display until the mileage counter reaches
When this message is displayed, the engine can still be a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. The
started. However, the vehicle will only operate at a
message will continue to countdown until it reaches NOTE:
maximum speed of 5 mph.
zero unless the vehicle is serviced. We recommend you  The charging system is independent from load reduc-
drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This message will
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
vehicle serviced immediately. display when the fault is initially detected, each time
charging system continuously.
the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving.
NOTE: The message will be accompanied by a single chime.  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
Under some circumstances this mileage counter may We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized a problem with the charging system Ú page 116.
start with a value of less than 150 miles (241 km). For dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as
example, if recurring faults are detected in a time interval possible.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched off

(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected
 The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
by load reduction:  The battery was used for an extended period with the The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
 Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
game consoles and similar devices.
 HVAC System considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
 Audio and Telematics System “Battery Saver Mode”)
menu may appear different based upon equipment 3
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the During a trip: options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
following conditions:  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: optional and may not appear.
 The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior). RED WARNING LIGHTS
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.  Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports. Air Bag Warning Light
The charging system is still functioning properly.
 Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-  Check the audio settings (volume). eight seconds as a bulb check when the
loaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB After a trip: ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
towing, frequent stopping).  Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
 Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec- systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar and Ignition Off Draw currents). during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
devices. system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving possible.
 Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long time and parking time).
parking periods).
 The vehicle should have service performed if the
Brake Warning Light
 The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time message is still present during consecutive trips and This warning light monitors various brake
(weeks, months). the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not functions, including brake fluid level and
 The battery was recently replaced and was not charged help to identify the cause. parking brake application. If the brake light
completely. turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake repair to the ABS system is required. problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by detected while the vehicle is running, the light
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the will either stay on or flash depending on the
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic inspected by an authorized dealer. vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE:
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
dropped below a specified level. NOTE: are pressed at the same time.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
It does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: immediate service is required and you may experience
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
Battery Charge Warning Light reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
This warning light will illuminate when the stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
while the engine is running, there may be a ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
fluid level checked.
malfunction with the charging system. check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING! This indicates a possible problem with the electrical Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
system or a related component. Light
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It Door Open Warning Light This warning light warns of an overheated
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a This indicator will illuminate when a door is engine condition. If the engine coolant
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. ajar/open and not fully closed. temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
NOTE: will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime. cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light CAUTION!
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is transmission damage or transmission failure.
service Ú page 364.
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
Hood Open Warning Light When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
This warning light will illuminate when the hood If Equipped
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound 3
Ú page 315. This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
NOTE: security system is arming, and then will flash
This warning light will illuminate when the slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Oil Pressure Warning Light YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as This warning light will illuminate to warn of a Warning Light — If Equipped
soon as possible, and contact an authorized high transmission fluid temperature. This may This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. occur with strenuous usage such as trailer fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle authorized dealer for service Ú page 175.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light —
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
Oil Temperature Warning Light drive normally. If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the This light will illuminate when a fault is
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns WARNING! detected with the air suspension system.
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off If you continue operating the vehicle when the
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
temperature to return to normal levels. you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
Light in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This warning light will illuminate when the
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light windshield washer fluid is low.
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may when ESC becomes inactive.
stay on for as long as four seconds. Low Fuel Warning Light
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then ESC event. When the fuel level reaches approximately
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not 3.2 gal (12 L) this light will turn on, and remain
functioning and service is required as soon as possible. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF on until fuel is added.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to Warning Light — If Equipped
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
also on. This warning light indicates the
ESC is off. Low Coolant Level Warning Light
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake This telltale will turn on to indicate the
system inspected by an authorized dealer. vehicle coolant level is low.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Warning Light — If Equipped Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped If Equipped
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the The LaneSense system provides the driver with This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
instrument cluster will come on when the visual and steering torque warnings when the filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ vehicle starts to drift out of its lane disengage the light. If the light does not turn
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out unintentionally without the use of a turn signal. off, please see an authorized dealer.
with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction tion, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light to solid yellow. Warning Light (MIL)
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer approached and is in a lane departure situation, the (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green called OBD II that monitors engine and
corrected. to flashing yellow Ú page 187. automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light — Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
This warning light will illuminate to indicate Cruise Control System is not functioning
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, properly and service is required. Contact an
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine when a rear axle locker fault has been
detected. authorized dealer.
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations, Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. Service Forward Collision (FCW) or This light will illuminate when there is a fault in
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) the sway bar disconnect system. 3
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of Warning Light — If Equipped
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
fault in the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
possible if this occurs.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System. Warning Light
Contact an authorized dealer for service The warning light switches on and a message is
WARNING!
Ú page 306. displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher lower than the recommended value and/or
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over If Equipped cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, This warning light will illuminate when the not be guaranteed.
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious LaneSense system is not operating and Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
injury to the driver, occupants or others. requires service. Please see an authorized mentioned, the display will show the indications
dealer. corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
system. It also could affect fuel economy and system is not functioning properly and that avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic service is required. We recommend you drive to the occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
Immediate service is required. immediately. as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation reasons, including the installation of replacement or
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Indicator Light — If Equipped
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS This light will illuminate when the Bed Lowering
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or mode procedure is complete Ú page 155.
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
those tires. function properly. Air Suspension Payload Protection
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been Indicator Light — If Equipped
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure CAUTION!
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly The TPMS has been optimized for the original that the maximum payload may have been
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires warning have been established for the tire size at its current ride height. Protection mode will
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system automatically be selected in order to “protect” the air
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire operation or sensor damage may result when using suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. replacement equipment that is not of the same size, due to payload.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
ability. cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper sensor to become inoperable. After using an
This light will blink and alert the driver that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
vehicle is changing to a higher ride height
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
Ú page 155.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Indicator Light — If Equipped
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height This light will blink and alert the driver that the
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for Indicator Light — If Equipped Ú page 155.
approximately one minute and then remain continuously This light will illuminate when the air
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent suspension system is set to the Alternate
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When Trailer Height setting Ú page 155.
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
Cargo Indicator Light — If Equipped Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if the the 4WD High mode. The front and rear
light button on the headlight switch. vehicle is low on DEF Ú page 391. driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator the same speed.
Light — If Equipped NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped Snowplow Mode Indicator Light —
This indicator light will illuminate when a derate This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power If Equipped 3
(engine power reduction) is activated for transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the
This indicator light will illuminate when
protection of the turbocharger in cold ambient front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from
Snowplow mode has been activated
temperatures. the powertrain.
Ú page 217.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
If Equipped This light indicates when the rear axle lock has Sway Bar Indicator Light —
This indicator light will illuminate when the been activated Ú page 148. If Equipped
Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and This indicator light will illuminate when the
is in full strength mode Ú page 139. front sway bar is disconnected.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off the 4WD Lock mode. The front and rear TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
driveshafts are mechanically locked together, This indicator light will illuminate when
Indicator Light — If Equipped forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that the same speed Ú page 148.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian
Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear If Equipped
driveshafts are mechanically locked together This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at when Trailer Merge Assist has been activated
axles have been locked. The telltale will display the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
the lock icon on the front and rear axles to
Ú page 301.
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
indicate the current lock status. Ú page 148.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped No Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the
when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise front fog lights are on.
this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle Control is SET and there is no vehicle in front
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to detected Ú page 175.
prevent engine damage. LaneSense Indicator Light —
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for If Equipped The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
approximately two seconds when the ignition is green when both lane markings have been
This indicator light will illuminate when the
turned to the RUN position. Its duration may be detected and the system is “armed” and ready
cruise control is set to the desired speed
longer based on colder operating conditions. to provide visual and torque warnings if an
Ú page 174.
Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 187.
displayed Ú page 128.
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
NOTE:
Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the intake parking lights or headlights are turned on.
manifold temperature is warm enough. This indicator light will illuminate when the
Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS has switched to Automatic mode Ú page 139.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With ECO Mode Indicator Light — When the left or right turn signal is activated,
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped If Equipped the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
This will display when the ACC is set and a This light will turn on when turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
vehicle in front is detected Ú page 175. ECO mode is active. activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE: Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven Light — If Equipped
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi- turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
cator flashes at a rapid rate. is armed. HDC can only be armed when the control systems. When these systems are operating
 If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the side of transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
the activated turn signal will also illuminate to provide the vehicle speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
additional light when turning. conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC current government regulations.
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. 3
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready also store diagnostic codes and other information to
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
Indicator Light — If Equipped armed, the LaneSense indicator light
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
This light will illuminate when the vehicle see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
left, right, or neither lane line has been
equipped with ACC has been turned on but not detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
set Ú page 175. ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional CAUTION!
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light Ú page 187. damage to the emission control system. It could also
This indicator light will illuminate when the affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 174.
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS must be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
High Beam Indicator Light
 If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams.
If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a
temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
connection port to allow access to information related to
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. happen:
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
service technicians may need to access this information to  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection and return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
emissions system Ú page 225. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the the ignition or start the engine. This means that
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you
WARNING! and is not on when the engine is running, and should not proceed to the I/M station.
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
 ONLY an authorized service technician should  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently tion or start the engine. This means that your
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can
vehicle.
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined proceed to the I/M station.
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
device, it may: authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
 Be possible that vehicle systems, including vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
safety related systems, could be impaired or a 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
loss of vehicle control could occur that may not crank or start the engine. update. A recheck with the previous mentioned test
result in an accident involving serious injury or routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
death.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
 Access, or allow others to access, information test over. ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
stored in your vehicle systems, including operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
personal information. going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
125
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE WARNING! KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
ENGINE  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both serious injury or death. Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. compartment.
The starter should not be operated for more than
10-second intervals. Waiting 10 - 15 seconds between AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
such intervals will protect the starter from overheating. START/STOP B UTTON 4
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
WARNING!
NOTE: Button
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the 1. The transmission must be in PARK.
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove  This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
shift out of PARK. ENGINE START/STOP button once.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
 If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
Park Release has been activated Ú page 363. disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned TIP START F EATURE 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
gear selector. Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition switch button again.
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in NOTE:
motor will continue to run and will automatically
a location accessible to children, and do not leave Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
disengage when the engine is running.
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child pedal.
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Button Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) WARNING!
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
release the ENGINE START/STOP button. ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and ON/ vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting the your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these directions: blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place precaution, always apply the parking brake when
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. the ignition to the ACC position. exiting the vehicle.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position. designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
twice to the OFF position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not be
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE return the ignition to the OFF position. relied upon as the primary method by which the
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument cluster AUTOPARK — R OTARY S HIFTER AND
will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out 8-SPEED T RANSMISSION O NLY If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
of the PARK position, or it could roll. engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
NOTE: the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/ pages occur. It is a back-up system and should not be  Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below relied upon as the primary method by which the driver transmission
5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition shifts the vehicle into PARK.
 Vehicle is not in PARK
will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. outlined on the following pages.  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ú page 126.  Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to
ACC position. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to
OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition
switch off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
WARNING! EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the NOTE:
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed been started or driven for at least 30 days.
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
transmission
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
 Vehicle is not in PARK always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less crank cycle.
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled 4WD Low — If Equipped 2. Place the ignition to the START position and release it
 Driver’s door is ajar AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
4WD Low. ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
 Brake pedal is not pressed while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 4
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. 10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
NOTE: Additional customer warnings will be given when all of repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in these conditions are met:
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the instrument cluster, causing the “AutoPark Engaged  Vehicle is not in PARK the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
Shift To P Then Shift To Gear” to not be seen. In these  Driver’s door is ajar the Extended Park Starting procedure.
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired
gear.  Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
CAUTION!
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
AutoPark. the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph closed. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
(1.9 km/h) or less.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is near the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART CAUTION! STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously 15 seconds before trying again. The starter should not be operated for more than
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
25-second intervals. Waiting two minutes between such
the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking WARNING!
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
once the engine is running smoothly. serious injury or death.
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
WARNING! period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
“Normal Starting” procedure.
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing COLD WEATHER OPERATION access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
serious personal injury.
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel an externally powered electric engine block heater not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
could enter the catalytic converter and once the (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended. gear selector.
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
AFTER S TARTING  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster decrease as the engine warms up. Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of could operate power windows, other controls, or
start can be dangerous if done improperly move the vehicle.
Ú page 361.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to 5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
the engine starting, remove your foot from the brake ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
Start the engine with the transmission in the NEUTRAL or pedal and push the ENGINE START/STOP button seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any again. engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position
driving range. (NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned off when
NOTE:
the transmission is not in PARK.
Tip Start Feature  Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition switch obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator NOTE:
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter pedal. If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine not
motor will continue to run and will automatically running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
 Under cold weather conditions, the engine may not system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
disengage when the engine is running. immediately crank if the Wait To Start Indicator Light is inactivity and the ignition return to the OFF position.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION illuminated. This is normal operation. For vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, the vehicle will
4
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS —
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch automatically crank when the Wait To Start time has
WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/ elapsed Ú page 130.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION)
compartment. TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
Normal Starting START/STOP BUTTON ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
steps:
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
ENGINE START/STOP button once. START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
the ignition to the ACC position.
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the and the engine will remain running. Never leave a 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. to change the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE return the ignition to the OFF position.
START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC position.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure — 4. After the engine Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off, EXTREME COLD WEATHER
the engine will automatically crank.
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped with
66° F (–18° C to 19° C) CAUTION! several features designed to assist cold weather starting
NOTE: and operation:
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the  The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed
not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind
temperature Ú page 104. When engine temperatures fall two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating the oil filter. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical
below 66°F (19°C) the Wait To Start Indicator Light will start procedure. outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
remain on indicating the intake air heater system is active. NOTE:
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure 5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is oil The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option.
except: pressure. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available
1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
driver’s foot on the brake will move the ignition from  A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings aid in
OFF or ACC to ON/RUN, and will illuminate the Wait NOTE: preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in ther-
To Start Indicator Light. The engine will not  Engine idle speed will automatically increase to mostat.
immediately crank, this is normal operation. 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry  An intake air heater system both improves engine
2. The Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on for a Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to improve starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
period of time that varies depending on the engine engine warm-up. generated by a warming engine.
temperature.  The engine will not automatically crank after the engine
3. While the Wait To Start Indicator Light is on, the Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off if a door or the
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or hood is ajar. ENGINE MANIFOLD A IR T EMPERATURE
bar whose initial length represents the full Wait to
Start time period. Its length will decrease until it
 If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for ABOVE 66° F (19° C)
more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
disappears when the Wait to Start time has elapsed. Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when starting
ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five the engine.
CAUTION! seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 6 1. Always apply the parking brake.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT of “Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure – Engine
Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To 66° F (–18° C to 2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage Ú page 387. 19° C).” 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
watch the instrument panel cluster lights.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure 4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil Pressure
CAUTION! except: Warning Light has turned off.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT 1. The Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on for a 5. Release the parking brake and drive.
START the engine before you drain the water from the period of time that varies depending on the engine
fuel filters to avoid engine damage Ú page 387. NOTE:
temperature.
 Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
2. While the Wait To Start Indicator Light is on, the
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry Turbo-
4. Place the ignition switch in the START position and instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or
charger at low coolant temperatures to improve engine
crank the engine. Do not press the accelerator during bar whose initial length represents the full Wait To
warm-up.
starting. Start time period. Its length will decrease until it
disappears when the Wait To Start time has elapsed.  Automatic equipped vehicles with optional Keyless
CAUTION! Enter ‘n Go™ – If the start button is pushed once while
CAUTION! in PARK with the ignition off and driver’s foot on the 4
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a brake pedal, the vehicle will automatically crank and
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT start after the Wait to Start time has elapsed. If it is
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least START the engine before you drain the water from the desired to abort the start process before it completes,
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating fuel filters to avoid engine damage Ú page 387. the driver’s foot should be fully removed from the
start procedure. brake pedal prior to pushing the start button again in
3. After the Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off, place order for the ignition to move directly to off.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has turned off. the ignition switch in the START position. Do not press  If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for
the accelerator during starting. more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
6. Release the parking brake.
Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE CAUTION! ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5
MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F T O Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Tempera-
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
66°F (–18°C TO 19°C) ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
ture 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C).”
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
NOTE:
start procedure.
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does
not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air temperature
Ú page 104. When engine temperatures fall below 66°F
(19°C) the Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE 2. Heat generated by the intake air heater dissipates STARTING FLUIDS
rapidly in a cold engine. If more than two minutes
MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE B ELOW pass between the time the Wait To Start Indicator
WARNING!
0°F (-18°C) Light turns off and the engine is started, recycle the
intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never be used
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be OFF position for at least five seconds and then back in the Cummins® diesel engine (see Warning label).
beneficial to cycle the intake air heater twice before to the ON/RUN position. Never pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid, starting fluids
attempting to start the engine. This can be accomplished 3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds (ether) into the air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or
by turning the ignition off for at least 5 seconds and then 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake air heater turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the vehicle.
back to the ON/RUN position after the Wait To Start post-heat (after start) cycle is complete, the intake air This could result in a flash fire and explosion causing
Indicator Light has turned off, but before the engine is heater will shut off. serious personal injury and engine damage.
started. However, excessive cycling of the intake air
heater will result in damage to the heater elements or 4. If the engine is cranked for more than 10 seconds,
reduced battery voltage. the post-heat cycle will turn off. The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air
NOTE: preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are
NOTE: followed, the engine should start in all conditions.
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting, addi-  Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
tional engine run time may be required to maintain battery 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry WARNING!
state of charge at a satisfactory level. Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to improve
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the ignition engine warm-up.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
must be turned to the OFF position for at least five cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
 When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel or the
seconds and then to the ON/RUN position to recycle serious injury or death.
fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled into the fuel
the intake air heater. system. If your engine has run out of fuel Ú page 390.  When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
NOTE: keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
 If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for
Excessive white smoke and poor engine performance will the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
result if intake air heater is not recycled. Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Tempera- number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ture 0°F to 66°F (-18°C to 19°C)” Ú page 130. ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS NOTE:

 Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in a
a location accessible to children, and do not leave require special considerations. The following charts noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless suggest these options:
 Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child Fuel Operating Range Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low
could operate power windows, other controls, or
NOTE: Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature at
move the vehicle.
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY. which wax crystals form in fuel.
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE at the fuel station.
Observe the following when the engine is operating:

 The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel 4
Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
 All message center lights are off. exhaust system damage Ú page 442.
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.  If Climatized or Diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not avail-
 Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle. able, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in
sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel
 Voltmeter operation:
Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by
 Under some circumstances increased engine noise
the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system.
may be audible in the seconds following a cold start.
The number of cycles and the length of the cycling
This is most likely to occur when using fuel that isn't
operation is controlled by the engine control module.
blended for the ambient temperature present. This
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then
may occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
Fuel Operating Range Chart truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven to a
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of the colder climate. The noise can typically be prevented by
headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable *Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be using Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as
reduction in blower motor speed. used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist. recommended (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage NOTE: ENGINE IDLING

High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can result in
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 381. Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may be
excessive white smoke and poor engine performance.
Winter Front Cover Usage No-load engine speeds should be kept under 1,000 RPM harmful to your engine because combustion chamber
during the warm-up period, especially in cold ambient temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
temperature conditions.
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially varnish to form on piston rings, engine valves, and injector
during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm-up
nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
with four flaps for managing total grille opening in varying protection feature that may limit engine performance after
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The length of
cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the full open time engine speed is limited is dependent upon engine If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low
position to allow air flow to the charge air cooler and coolant temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the
automatic transmission oil cooler. When ambient to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant temperature system will automatically enter an emissions operating
temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need below freezing conditions, and may be limited to mode that will increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM.
to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover is available 1,000 RPM for up to approximately two minutes While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain the
from your Mopar® dealer. under more severe cold conditions. diesel particulate filter, the engine idle speed will return to
normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in
Battery Blanket Usage NOTE:
engine tone or a slight change in engine performance
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine idle
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For the same 20 mph (32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up to
speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after two minutes
decrease in temperature, the engine requires twice as an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
of idle, if the following conditions are met:
much power to crank at the same RPM. The use of Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
120 Volt AC powered battery blankets will greatly increase  Foot is off brake pedal and accelerator pedal.
voltage monitoring Idle-Up feature. If a load is placed on
starting capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery  Automatic transmission is in PARK. the electrical system while the truck is in park, this feature
blankets are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.  Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). will attempt to maintain normal system voltage by
Engine Warm-Up automatically increasing engine idle speed. You may
 Applying the accelerator pedal will cancel fast idle.
notice several consecutive increases in idle speed, up to a
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When  Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly improve maximum of 1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to
starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating warm-up rate and will help keep the engine close to utilize the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to
speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the operating temperature during extended idle. maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed will return
engine warms up. to normal when either the electrical load is removed, or
when the brake pedal is applied.
NOTE: To decrease the RPM, push and hold the SET (-) 10% which is a normal condition of the fuel system and
For instrument cluster display messages related to the button and the idle speed will decrease to approxi- controls strategy. Diesel equipped vehicles also have an
vehicle's exhaust system Ú page 104. mately 1,100 RPM. exhaust after-treatment system to reduce emissions
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and a Selective
Idle-Up Feature Reduction Catalyst (SCR). The SCR reduces Nitrogen
CANCEL button, push the On/Off button, or press the
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will help brake pedal. Oxides (NOx) using the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system.
increase cylinder temperatures and provide additional cab DEF is injected directly into the SCR through a dosing
heat, however, excessive idling may still cause the NOISE module. This process will create a clicking sound and at
exhaust aftertreatment system to not properly regenerate. times, will make noise even with the vehicle shut off. This
Extended periods of idle time should be avoided. Diesel engines can create noises that may seem is normal as the DEF dosing module is purging DEF. If at
concerning. The nature of a diesel engine is compression any time the Check Engine Light is on, please visit an
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control buttons to
ignition where compressed air and fuel are mixed and authorized dealer.
increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the vehicle's
ignited. Weather, barometric pressure, altitude, and 4
interior.
temperature will affect how fuel is ignited in the engine. STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking brake Engines will sound different from day to day or previous
applied, and the engine running, push the On/Off model years. Clicking, ticking, or light knocking is normal Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown.
button to the ON position, then push the SET (-) and will change from day to day, as the engine breaks in, After full load operation, idle the engine three to
button. and can vary with changes in ambient temperature. five minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will
Clicking sound from under the hood shortly after vehicle allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To increase away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
the RPM, push and hold the RES (+) button and the shutdown is normal as actuators such as the EGR valve
are cycled. Fuel pump noise may increase during low components, and turbocharger. This is especially
idle speed will increase to approximately 1,500 RPM. important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines.
speed/light load conditions when ambient temperature is
above 100°F (38°C), and when fuel tank level is below Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
I DLE SHUTDOWN Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation CAUTION!

Continual operation at low engine coolant (antifreeze)
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
temperature below the normal range on the gauge 140°F
automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could result
(60°C) can be harmful to the engine. Low engine coolant
a set period of time when the engine is at operating in immediate and severe engine damage.
(antifreeze) temperature can cause incomplete
temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments
combustion which allows carbon and varnish to form on
between 5 and 60 minutes. See an authorized dealer to
piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel
enable this feature. Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil and
NOTE: causing rapid wear to the engine. Parts
The idle shutdown timer is disabled while the Power Take All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail.
Off (PTO) is active. COOLING SYSTEM T IPS Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE To reduce potential for engine and transmission visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some
important clues are:
overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take
S PEED the following actions:  Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum vehicle  City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission  Sudden loss of power.
speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and 3500 Series into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
 Unusual engine noises.
maximum vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph  Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
(64 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h).  Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
 Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.
NOTE:  Sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value greater  Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily. the engine operating temperature.
than what the vehicle tires are rated for. Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil  Excessive smoke.
OPERATING P RECAUTIONS Pressure  Oil pressure drop.

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the
Avoid Overheating The Engine minimum oil pressures required are:
The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze) (a
Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must not
exceed the normal range of the temperature gauge 240°F Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
(116°C) with a 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze) temperature
indicated during operation will be to the left of center in
the normal range of the gauge.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
GASOLINE ENGINE DIESEL ENGINE
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a A long break-in period is not required for the engine and The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not require a
grounded, three-wire extension cord. drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. break-in period due to its construction. Normal operation
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). is allowed, providing the following recommendations are
The engine block heater cord is routed behind the
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or followed:
front bumper and accessible through the right hole of
the air dam. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.  Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the  Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.  Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be engine lugging. 4
detrimental and should be avoided.
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not  Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
in use for the Winter months. During Winter months, The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a tors.
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
c-clip. should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions  Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the  Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying
NOTE:
recommended viscosity and quality grades Ú page 446. or towing significant weight.
The block heater will require 110 Volt AC and 6.5 Amps to
activate the heater element. NOTE:
CAUTION! Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load
Block Heater Usage
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in operation will extend the time before the engine is at full
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), engine the engine or damage may result. efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen
block heater usage is recommended. at this time.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C), engine For additional vehicle break-in requirements Ú page 212.
block heater usage is required. NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few Because of the construction of the Cummins® Turbo
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter- operating conditions which allow the engine parts to
preted as a problem. Please check your oil level with the achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles
engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add (10,000 km).
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE NOTE:

WARNING!
 When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the if vehicle speed is detected. A chime will sound if the a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
transmission in PARK. vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) to alert the vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
The foot-operated parking brake is located below the driver. Fully release the parking brake before ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the attempting to move the vehicle. windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully.  This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.  Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
Vehicle should be completely stopped before the parking It does not show the degree of brake application. driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
brake is applied. To release the parking brake, pull the a collision.
parking brake release handle. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from  Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake roll and cause damage or injury.
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the brake released, a brake system malfunction is
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and authorized dealer immediately.
Parking Brake Release possible injury or damage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
illuminate. children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
(Continued)
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE CAUTION!

BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recommended
and could lead to engine damage.
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking) feature
is to supply negative (braking) torque from the engine.
Typically, the engine braking is used for, but not limited to, NOTE:
vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can be For optimum braking power it is recommended to use the
achieved by the internal engine power, thereby sparing the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.
mechanical brakes of the vehicle. The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce the
Benefits of the exhaust brake are: engine warm-up time. To use the exhaust brake as a
 Vehicle driving control. Exhaust Brake Switch warm-up device, the vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Exhaust Brake Indicator
4
 Reduced brake fade. Once the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated and the must be on, and the coolant temperature must be
 Longer brake life. vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h); the exhaust below 180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
brake will automatically operate when the driver removes 60°F (16°C).
 Faster cab warm-up. pressure from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
The exhaust brake feature will only function when the most effective when the engine RPM is higher. The
driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust brake button automatic transmission will downshift more aggressively Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology delivers
until the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated. Normal in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust brake is enabled to smoother, less aggressive exhaust braking characteristics
(Full Strength) exhaust brake mode is indicated by a yellow increase brake performance. during downhill descents. Although it can apply full
Exhaust Brake Indicator. exhaust braking force if needed, Automatic “Smart”
WARNING! Exhaust Brake may not apply obvious braking if the vehicle
speed is not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when driving in is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full Exhaust
icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the
vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled by
control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center stack)
in personal injury or death. again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust Brake has
been turned on. The Exhaust Brake Indicator in the
instrument cluster display will change from Yellow to
Green when Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled.
Pushing the exhaust brake button again will toggle the
exhaust brake mode to off.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING! CAUTION!

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
of PARK. those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you precautions are not observed:
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
WARNING!  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
against unwanted movement.
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK
PARK before exiting the vehicle.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
transmission gear selector. OFF position.
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in NOTE:
a location accessible to children), and do not leave The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
could operate power windows, other controls, or Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move the vehicle. is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
(Continued)
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift Gear Ranges
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM and road conditions. The transmission electronics are Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal NOTE:
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
hundred miles (kilometers). selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the cially important when the engine is cold.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. PARK (P)
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
stopped or moving at low speeds.
between these gears. transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION — The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. 4
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
I F EQUIPPED made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift range.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above highest available transmission gear, and will display that precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must Ú page 143. Some models will display both the selected
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode. NOTE:
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once is in a drive position.
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector When exiting the vehicle, always:
to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for  Apply the parking brake.
normal driving.
 Shift the transmission into PARK.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector  Turn the engine off.
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,  Remove the key fob.
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector

NEUTRAL (N) When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

CAUTION! when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL
damage the drivetrain. vehicle. mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control to select a lower gear range Ú page 143.
 Before moving the transmission gear selector out of Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the WARNING!
improve performance and extend transmission life by
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
could result. to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
limit your response to changing traffic or road
below), transmission operation may be modified
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you depending on engine and transmission temperature as
have a collision.
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
position: the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
 Look at the transmission gear position display and
CAUTION! Transmission Limp Home Mode
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking. Transmission function is monitored electronically for
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
selector will not move out of PARK. severe transmission damage.
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
REVERSE (R) For Recreational Towing Ú page 219. operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 366.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
stop.
DRIVE (D) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
This range should be used for most city and highway
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
may be necessary.
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in WARNING!
following steps: DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
NOTE: shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR “–” slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set personal injury.
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
that gear as the top available gear.
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–” or GEAR “+”
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
switch will change the top available gear. When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
1. Stop the vehicle.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate 4
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and
turns off. reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE: ERS Control
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve- 1 — GEAR “+” Switch
nience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to 2 — GEAR “–” Switch
assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR “+”
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation switch until the gear limit display disappears from the TOW/HAUL Switch
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest instrument cluster.
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
example, if you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
gear, the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear, normal operation.
but will shift through the lower gears normally.
Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
each time the engine is started. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
between these gears. to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
WARNING! The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or
slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift When exiting the vehicle, always:
cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the  Apply the parking brake.
around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that  Shift the transmission into PARK.
may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death. gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.  Turn the engine off.
Ú page 143. Some models will display both the selected  Remove the key fob.
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
6-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION — Gear Ranges
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
I F EQUIPPED Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from is in a drive position.
Pickup models may use either AS69RC transmission, or PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
the 68RFE transmission (which has no PTO access cover). NOTE:
The transmission gear position display (located in the After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the  Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe- PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the cially important when the engine is cold. tion, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move PARK (P) damage to the gear selector could result.
the gear selector out of PARK Ú page 141. To drive, move This range supplements the parking brake by locking the  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE transmission. The engine can be started in this range. NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. damage the drivetrain.
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
The electronically controlled transmission provides a range.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK CAUTION! of overheating, the Transmission Temperature Warning
position: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate
 When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause differently until the transmission cools down.
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it severe transmission damage. NOTE:
stops. Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at
For Recreational Towing Ú page 219.
 Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or
seated in the PARK gate. For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 366. in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these condi-
tions, torque converter slip can impose a significant addi-
 Look at the transmission gear position display and tional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). DRIVE (D)
transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear This range should be used for most city and highway grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy 4
selector will not move out of PARK. driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
REVERSE (R) During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into modified depending on engine and transmission
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
stop.
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
NEUTRAL (N) winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift warm Ú page 147. On Pickup models with 68RFE
periods with the engine running. The engine may be control to select a lower gear range Ú page 143. Under transmission, top overdrive gear is also inhibited until the
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve transmission fluid is warm, and during extremely cold
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. performance and extend transmission life by reducing temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may
excessive shifting and heat buildup. briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. On trucks
WARNING! If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating with AS69RC transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F (5°C), and
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition during very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. During
limit your response to changing traffic or road this condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate under
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
heavily loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases,
have a collision. normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR “+”
service is required. switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
Transmission function is monitored electronically for instrument cluster.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest WARNING!
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
in FOURTH gear (for 68RFE transmission) or THIRD gear example, if you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
(for AS69RC transmission) regardless of which forward gear, the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear, slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
gear is selected. If an AS69RC-equipped truck enters Limp but will shift through the lower gears normally. and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
Home mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage personal injury.
FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed where third You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
gear can be engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) position, the transmission will operate automatically,
Transmission
may be illuminated. Limp Home mode allows the vehicle shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR “-”
Gear Limit 1 2 3 4 5 6 D
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top Display
damaging the transmission.
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–” Actual Gear(s)
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
or GEAR “+” switch will change the top available gear. Allowed
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle. NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum deceler-
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. ation (engine braking), simply push and hold the GEAR “–”
3. Turn the ignition OFF. switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. the vehicle can best be slowed down.
5. Restart the engine. CAUTION!

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
longer detected, the transmission will return to
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
normal operation.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine
NOTE: Electronic Range Select overspeed.
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible 1 — GEAR “+” Switch
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic 2 — GEAR “–” Switch
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
Overdrive Operation Torque Converter Clutch

The automatic transmission includes an electronically A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and SIXTH gears). The included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
following conditions are present: at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
 The gear selector is in the DRIVE position. feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
 The transmission fluid has reached an adequate accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
temperature.
NOTE:
 The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.  The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
 The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
TOW/HAUL Switch transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm 4
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
 The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the Because engine speed is higher when the torque
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a normal operation. Normal operation is always the default normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL switch must be pushed each time the engine is started. demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the and out of Overdrive.
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to WARNING!
 If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
maneuvers. may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal cause damage to the transmission. The torque
injury or death. converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s

speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
positions:
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in the during drive. The system is deactivated when the windows  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be are rolled down.
used to power various electronic devices and Power Take  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Off (PTO). If equipped, it will take the place of the sixth
auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
 N (Neutral)
under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary IF EQUIPPED For additional information on the appropriate use of each
Power Distribution Center.
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a transfer case position, see the following information:
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All 2WD
transfer case.
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
operation to latching or momentary, power source of ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state
across key cycles. CASE (8-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — 4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides
NOTE: I F E QUIPPED torque to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel drive)
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is which allows front and rear wheels to spin at the same
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is
set to latching and power source is set to ignition. speed. This provides additional traction for loose, slippery
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case
For further information on using the auxiliary switches, Switch), which is located on the instrument panel. road surfaces only.
please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s Guide by accessing 4WD LOW
https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html and choosing the appropriate Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
links. speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque (increased
torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front wheels, allowing front
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling power
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
system that cannot be turned off. This system is designed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
to address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies on
four microphones embedded in the headliner, which
monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists an
onboard frequency generator, which creates
Four-Position Transfer Case
N (Neutral) When additional traction is required, the transfer case If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Not
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to Met:
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front 1. The indicator light for the current position will
towing behind another vehicle Ú page 219. and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is remain on.
accomplished by pushing the desired position on the
four-wheel drive control switch. 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
WARNING! continue to flash.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 150.
 You or others could be injured or killed if you leave 3. The transfer case will not shift.
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD NOTE:
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
disengages both the front and rear drive shaft from may cause increased tire wear and damage to the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even driveline components. position have been met. To retry the selection, push the 4
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection.
NOTE:
should always be applied when the driver is not in To find the shift requirements Ú page 150.
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center
the vehicle. of the four-wheel drive Control Switch and is pushed by The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means that
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
only Ú page 219. the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
that service is required.
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and WARNING!
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. Always engage the parking brake when powering down
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated.
indicator lights will do the following: Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
roll which may cause personal injury or death.
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
Driving the vehicle in two-wheel drive will have greater fuel NOTE:
economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
two-wheel drive. transfer case completes the shift. wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the components.
selected position will stop flashing and remain on.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine 2WD TO 4WD HIGH Preferred Procedure
speed is approximately three times that of the two-wheel 1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between two-wheel 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h). drive and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on 3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. transfer case control switch.
the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the 4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
drivetrain. ON/RUN position with the engine either running or off. flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in Alternate Procedure
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping the ACC position.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. NOTE:
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
Shifting Procedure The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between
the engine running, shift the transmission into
2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are
NOTE: NEUTRAL.
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
 If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position indicator light will flash and the original position 3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
position have not been met, the transfer case will not indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed switch.
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi- and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift. 4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
tion will remain on and the newly selected position indi- flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
cator light will continue to flash until all the 2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
requirements for the selected position have been met. NOTE:
NOTE:
 If all the requirements to select a new transfer case When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise  If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
position have been met, the current position indicator may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
light will turn off, the selected position indicator light to the vehicle or occupants. shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. continuously while the original position indicator light is
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to on, until all requirements have been met.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
light for the selected position will stop flashing and  The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for
either of the following procedures:
remain on. a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/
RUN position, the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER For additional information on the appropriate use of each This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
transfer case position, see the following information: driven in the two-wheel drive position (two-wheel drive) for
CASE (6-S PEED TRANSMISSION) — 2WD normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard
I F EQUIPPED Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
surfaced roads.
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. When additional traction is required, the transfer case
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on 4WD HIGH maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
the instrument panel. Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear accomplished by rotating the four-wheel drive Control
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides Switch to the desired position.
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. For specific shifting instructions Ú page 152.
4WD LOW The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
4
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads
wheels, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and driveline components.
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces NOTE:
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower
N (Neutral) left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
Four-Position/Part-Time Transfer Case N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing only Ú page 219.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
positions: towing behind another vehicle Ú page 219. Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
WARNING! 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) When you select a different transfer case position, the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
 N (NEUTRAL) (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the indicator lights will do the following:
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

WARNING!
Shifting Procedure
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF. NOTE:
Always engage the parking brake when powering down
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the  If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is
transfer case completes the shift. position have not been met, the transfer case will not
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury. shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON. tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Not NOTE: ments for the selected position have been met. To retry
Met: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear a shift: return the control switch back to the original
1. The indicator light for the current position will wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to position, make certain all shift requirements have been
remain ON. driveline components. met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine  If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
continue to flash. speed is approximately three times that of the two-wheel position have been met, the current position indicator
3. The transfer case will not shift. drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
NOTE: 25 mph (40 km/h). When the shift is complete, the position indicator
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the light for the selected position will stop flashing and
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case remain ON.
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
control switch back to the current position, wait five 2WD TO 4WD HIGH
drivetrain.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments Ú page 152. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive control
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between two-wheel
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. drive and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped
four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case
engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means that will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If
that service is required. the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position with the engine either running or off.
This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
NOTE: 3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control For additional information on the appropriate use of each
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between switch. transfer case position, see the following information:
2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are 4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not 2H
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
position indicator light will flash and the original position Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed NOTE: street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.  If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate 4H
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
NOTE: continuously while the original position indicator light is rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise on, until all requirements have been met. traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental  The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for N (Neutral) 4
to the vehicle or occupants. a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use RUN position, the shift will not take place and no posi-
towing behind another vehicle Ú page 219.
either of the following procedures: tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
4L
Preferred Procedure MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER C ASE — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to I F E QUIPPED and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. The transfer case provides four positions: and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the  Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
transfer case control switch.  Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H) This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such
 N (Neutral)
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear. as dry, hard surfaced roads.
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, 2H OR 4H TO 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. NOTE:
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be
NOTE: heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the
moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced vehicle or occupants.
appropriate speed and gear requirements are met.
due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures,
Ú page 154 for further information. excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures. With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on WARNING!
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the transfer case Neutral.
and damage to the driveline components.
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NOTE:
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position  Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from equipped with an automatic transmission may require
are locked together. This light will illuminate when the the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if shutting the engine off to avoid gear clash while
transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the trans-
There is no light for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions on always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. mission into N (Neutral), hold your foot on the brake,
some models. and turn the engine off. Complete the range shift to the
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is desired position.
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted  Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the Transfer Case completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on 2H TO 4H attempts may be required for teeth alignment and shift
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can
damage to the drivetrain. attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
NOTE: motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster
if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after  Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the trans-
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting mission is in gear.
wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components. the transfer case lever.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light Standard Ride Height (SRH) – This is the standard position NOTE:
of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the  Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front Height (ATH) when unloaded.
conditions change.
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.  For further information Ú page 204.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used
as required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust
WARNING!
to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change. The air suspension system uses a high pressure
DESCRIPTION volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
NOTE:
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height If lightly loaded, 3500 models will lower as close to injury or damage to the system, see an authorized
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the 1 inch (25 mm) as possible. dealer for service.
truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable Trailer Decoupling/Unloading – The air suspension
4
heights that can be chosen based on your operating
conditions.
system will continue to load level after the vehicle has AIR SUSPENSION MODES
been turned off for 5 minutes without compressor
The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN activation. This allows for easy removal of a trailer and/or The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect
position or the engine running. load from the back of the truck by maintaining the ride the system in unique situations:
height. After 5 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to Tire/Jack Mode
the ON/RUN position for the air suspension to re-level due
to addition/removal of load in the vehicle. If the air To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
suspension system is disabled using the settings menu has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
(Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment Mode, or Bed disabled Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
Lowering Mode) the system will remain disabled when the NOTE:
vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
be accomplished via the settings menu or driving the running.
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode,
Alignment Mode, Transport Mode and Bed Lowering
Mode.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch

Transport Mode I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY  Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
MESSAGES vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the interface.
vehicle into Bed Lowering Mode and disable the automatic When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will  Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
load leveling system Ú page 104 or Ú page 226. appear in the instrument cluster display Ú page 104. nated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the interface.
NOTE: An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine has been detected.  Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
running. minated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving
See an authorized dealer for system service if normal the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the inter-
Wheel Alignment Mode operation does not resume. face.
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
OPERATION  Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster will be illu-
minated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled by driving the
NOTE: Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once vehicle, deselecting the mode via the interface, or by
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine while at Standard Ride Height (SRH), will lower the vehicle pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button.
running. to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
Bed Lowering Mode
LED.
NOTE:
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED
While at zero vehicle speed, this setting is used to lower This vehicle is equipped with an electronically locking rear
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle Alternate
the rear suspension to the lowest possible height and differential. Power Wagon also includes a locking front
Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the LED will
disable the air suspension system. It enables easier differential. These differentials, when engaged,
turn on.
loading/unloading of the truck and makes it easier to mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
hook up trailers Ú page 104 or Ú page 226. Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
the vehicle to Standard Ride Height (SRH).
Protection Strategy maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
NOTE: stuck. The locking differentials, rear or front, should only
In order to protect the air suspension system, the vehicle
The LED will continuously blink until Standard Ride Height be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
will disable load leveling as required (suspension
(SRH) has been achieved and the LED will turn off. where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with
automatically resume as soon as system operation
one or both of the differentials locked on pavement due to
requirements are met. See an authorized dealer if system
the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
does not resume.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock buttons. To lock the front axle, if equipped, push the FRONT/REAR
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle should be left LOCK button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h)
in the AXLE UNLOCK position. in 4WD LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will be
solid when the front axle is locked.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position, the NOTE:
limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock.
biasing capability for moderate low traction environments. When both the axles are locked, to unlock the front axle,
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light push the REAR LOCK button while in 4WD LOW. The
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on axle is unlocked.
solid. NOTE:
AXLE Lock Selector
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side
4
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD LOW, 4WD
1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the steering
HIGH or two-wheel drive Ú page 148. Push the REAR
locked (Power Wagon Only) wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving
LOCK button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked The REAR LOCK indicator light will remain on when the in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to
3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are rear axle is locked. release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
unlocked (Rear only if equipped) To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK button.
NOTE:
The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear
Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to
axle is unlocked.
allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is flashing
CAUTION! after placing the vehicle in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/
 Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
gravel to expedite the locking action.
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles WAGON ONLY
are locked on hard surfaced roads. WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
 Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving. stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drive- A locked front axle is intended for off-road driving only. suspension travel in off-road situations.
train components. Lock the rear axle before Locking the front axle during on-road driving will reduce
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which the steering ability. This could cause a collision and you
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck. may be seriously injured.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an

increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches WARNING! WARNING!
(48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) in the Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
rear. A major advantage to increasing ride height is the surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h), mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
positive effect it has on approach/departure and break you may lose control of the vehicle, which could result drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
over angles. in serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar enhances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining the vehicle, which could result in serious injury or
switch located below the instrument panel. control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle death. Contact your local service center for assistance.
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light. Once SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode. WAGON, REBEL OR OFF-ROAD PACKAGE
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4WD
EQUIPPED ONLY
HIGH or 4WD LOW and push the SWAY BAR button to
obtain the Off-Road position Ú page 148. The Sway Bar
OFF-R OAD D RIVING T IPS AND V EHICLE
Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has CHARACTERISTICS
been fully disconnected.
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
NOTE: These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those
SWAY BAR Disconnect Button
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push and right suspension height differences. This condition is exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out,
the switch again to deactivate the system. The Sway Bar due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In you should contact your local governmental agency to
Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) will order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, determine the designated Off-Road Vehicle (ORV) trails or
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The Sway Bar the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only
Indicator Light will flash during activation transition, or alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/ ground or rocked from side to side.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
sway bar should remain in On-Road mode during normal To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY BAR Management, or local Department of Natural Resources
driving conditions. button again. are a wealth of information and usually have maps with
marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection CAUTION! WARNING!

Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional situation.
protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
off-road situations that would be considered impassable
by a normal truck. Operation CAUTION!
Ramp Travel Index (RTI) Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can drive climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light exhaust system could cause a fire.
your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp without brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from 4
lifting any other wheel off the ground. This distance up the jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline. When To Use Low Range
multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of
429 (connected sway bar) or an RTI of 538 (disconnected The Basics Of Off-Road Driving When driving off-road, shift into 4WD LOW for additional
sway bar), which means you can articulate one front wheel traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
22 inches (56 cm) or 27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low range will allow
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground. the engine to operate in a higher power range. This will allow
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with improved
Water Fording Characteristics hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
control and less effort. Also, use 4WD LOW in rain, ice, snow,
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability to cross mud, and sand to get heavy loads rolling, improve traction,
vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain or whenever 4WD HIGH traction will not do the job.
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and DRIVING IN S NOW, MUD AND SAND
maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of you will need to use your own good judgment on what is steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of safe and what isn't. When on a trail you should always be should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
1.3 degrees. looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
remembering what you are currently driving over. vehicle's momentum.
 Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and trac-  Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake
tion at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if neces- trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not
sary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appro- WARNING!
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin priate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding
the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft loading which could cause you to lose control of your
a quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a vehicle.
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater
"bite" and help maintain your momentum. tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically Using A Spotter
improve your traction and handling, while driving on the
CAUTION! soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
pressure before driving on pavement or other hard or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine braking may up prior to reducing the pressure. many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
cause skidding and loss of control. over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
CAUTION! stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
 Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and guide you through.
around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
should use 4WD LOW with a gear low enough to main-
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your Crossing Large Rocks
tain your momentum without shifting. If you start to
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will
than a quarter turn quickly back and forth for additional
lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the
traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle CROSSING OBSTACLES (R OCKS AND tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of
debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good OTHER HIGH POINTS) designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
practice before entering any mud hole, get out and
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obsta-
cles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types CAUTION!
of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely  Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a to strike your axles or undercarriage.
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a  Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it enough to contact the door sills.
makes contact with the object.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout CAUTION!

 Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too
Or Rut steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your become high centered. and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
independently. You need to use caution when crossing Getting High Centered looks good and you feel confident, then change trans-
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great 4WD LOW and proceed with caution. You should use
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on  Driving Uphill – Once you have determined your ability 4
what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear,
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run.
a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
should now be able to drive out following the trench you Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try
just created at a 45-degree angle. more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward
rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade could
WARNING! cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to
CAUTION!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
increases the risk of underbody damage. the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
Crossing Logs of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway
HILL C LIMBING by turning the steering wheel no more than a quarter
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's "bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight
the vehicle off the log using your brakes. should always feel confident with the vehicle and your down the grade using engine resistance along with the
abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and vehicle brakes.
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
WARNING!
 Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid DRIVING THROUGH WATER
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
the risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
or death. sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable You should only drive through areas which are designated
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
heading slightly up or down. to the environment. You should know your vehicle's
 Driving Downhill – Before driving down a steep hill you abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. WARNING! You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obsta- Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.
cles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance which may result in severe injury. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle crossing is low and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in
descends too fast? If you feel confident in your ability  If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or 4WD LOW and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
to proceed then make sure you are in 4WD LOW with begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle.
the transmission in FIRST gear (manually select FIRST your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
gear on automatic transmissions) and proceed with the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
tires to lock. your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding CAUTION!
WARNING! the tires.
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending WARNING! too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle
seriously injured or killed. it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to components and your brakes will be less effective once
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling wet and/or muddy.
the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
 Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you approach  Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other AIRING DOWN FOR O FF-R OAD DRIVING
any type of water you need to determine if you can Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your ride
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current water can easily push your vehicle downstream pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form
waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will high current can still wash the dirt out from around your to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles
not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft damage with slower water currents in depths greater surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need
bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You to experiment to determine what is right for your situation.
the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this should never attempt to cross flowing water which is It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it.
when determining the depth and the ability to safely deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Start high and lower it as required. Remember you must 4
cross. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
 Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other downstream out of control if the water is deep enough road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.
standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy Before you proceed determine the speed of the
waters. These water types normally contain hidden current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom CAUTION!
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accu- condition and if there are any obstacles, then cross at
an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
rate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condi- and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
tion. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want slow technique.
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and avoid
a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are WARNING!
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
using the low and slow method. your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
CAUTION! or drowning.
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
VEHICLE RECOVERY CAUTION!

 Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clearing minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery the object, may result in additional underbody damage. is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are
should always be given consideration before attempting a designed to take the abusive force generated during
questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a  Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow
situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used straps requires coordination between the two drivers.
best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle Good communication and line of sight are required for
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the
something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go each shift. During this process, for additional traction, correct attachment points on both vehicles. There
backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between
anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have more than a quarter turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle or snow try spinning your tires during this process to join two tow straps together using a 1.5 inch hard wood
damage during the recovery process? Answering these clean the debris from the tread and improve the trac- dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted
questions will help you determine the best method of tion. You want to create a rocking motion with the and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks.
recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum, which Next have the tow vehicle back-up, leaving two to three
only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off and on feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle,
would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an the accelerator before and after the shift. If after a few using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impact rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try another strap providing the pulling force needed to free the
on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in
tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning
hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be environment. the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle.
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previ-
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on CAUTION! ously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
the object without causing further damage. This should be without using the brakes, once signaled by the other
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
tried before attempting any recovery method. driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the
recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
WARNING!
then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front AFTER D RIVING O FF-ROAD
tires. If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps using your spare tire by burying it. Once you have deter- Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could mined an anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum, a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (0.60 to and place a floor mat or something else over the strung problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
1 meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this out cable. Placing something over the strung out cable ready when you need it.
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage. helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next,  Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away place the vehicle in FIRST gear and apply a very light Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
from a strapping or winching situation. throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful not to exhaust system for damage.
allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do
not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
 Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” Ú page 166) – bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable required. 4
Winching is most commonly used in the following situ- afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
ations: there is no support vehicle available, a high always stand back while winching. on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
controlled force is required to recover the vehicle, there suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or WARNING! the values specified in the Service Manual.
where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and  Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
a high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
controlled manner. This control works well for avoiding
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while propeller shafts.
further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to
use the winch look for a good anchor point. It needs to winching. Failure to follow these instructions can result  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle's in serious or fatal injury. similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to improve and cleaned as soon as possible.
the angle of pull or increase the winch's pulling force. If
the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base
and hook the cable to the strap. If it is another vehicle,
WARNING! WARNING!
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential Follow the instructions listed to tension the rope:
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel 1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty remaining on the ground. You could lose control of winch drum.
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as the vehicle. 2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
necessary.
CAUTION!
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving in both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to to tension the winch rope.
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will a turn.
correct the situation. 3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the rope
WINCH USAGE — IF EQUIPPED while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
THINGS T O K NOW B EFORE U SING Y OUR
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is WINCH CAUTION!
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During General Winch Information The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in the
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
performs similarly to a conventional differential. On winch.
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds the
of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
winch rope onto the winch drum via planetary gear Low Voltage Interrupt
reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a the winch without reading and understanding the winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will complete winch owner's manual. drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for
supply maximum traction. When starting with only one 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
momentary application of the parking brake may be few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
necessary to gain maximum traction. recover before continuing to winch.
UNDERSTANDING T HE FEATURES OF 3. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will be WINCH ACCESSORIES
located on the bumper assembly) allows the remote
Y OUR WINCH control to be attached to the control pack to allow the The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to function. winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
4. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum winching.
allows the rope to be stored on the winch and Gloves: It is extremely important to wear
transmits force to the rope. The winch is equipped protective gloves while operating the winch or
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the handling the winch rope. Avoid loose fitting
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped. clothes or anything that could become
5. Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the winch entangled in the rope and other moving parts.
to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
force. This synthetic rope is highly flexible, multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1) 4
lightweight, and it floats. increase the winch's pulling power; and (2)
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum change your pulling direction without damaging
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the the winch rope. Proper use of the snatch block is covered
Winch Components in “Before You Pull.”
rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
1. Remote Control: The remote control provides the Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe
interface between the winch operator and the CAUTION! means of connecting the looped ends of
winch. The remote control provides the ability to cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shackle's
power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the hook. pin is threaded to allow easy removal.
operate the winch, the toggle switch is pushed down Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of tough,
to power the winch in and up to power the winch out. Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an
The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope. attachment point for the winch rope to a wide
(center) position. variety of anchor points and objects, as well as
2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle protects living trees.
charging system. Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided with the
synthetic rope and must be used with the synthetic rope at
all times to protect the rope from potential abrasion wear.
The sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily be positioned
along the synthetic rope to protect from rough surfaces
and sharp corners.
OPERATING Y OUR WINCH WARNING!

Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
WARNING!  Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery CAUTION!

strap attached directly to the winch hook.
 Always know your winch: Take the time to fully read
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
 Never use bungee or kinetic straps that develop and understand the included Installation and Opera-
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of tions Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Tech-
 Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook force when stretched. niques, in order to understand your winch and the
when spooling wire rope in or out. winching operation.
 Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.
 Never use as a hoist.  Always inspect winch installation and synthetic rope
 Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
condition before operating the winch. Frayed, kinked
 Never use to move persons. synthetic rope around the winch drum.
or damaged rope must be replaced immediately.
 Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated capacity.  Always pass remote control through a window to Loose or damaged winch installation must be
avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote corrected immediately.
 Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the
inside a vehicle.
synthetic rope.  Always be sure any element which can interfere with
 Never leave the remote control plugged into the safe winching operations is removed prior to initi-
 Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in tension
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle. ating winching.
or under load.
 Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
 Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, synthetic rope is in tension, or rope drum is General Information synthetic rope and rigging.
moving. Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key  Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or loose
points to remember when using your winch are: connections. Replace if damaged.
 Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load and
keep others away during winching.  Always take your time to assess the situation and plan  Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar through
your pull carefully. the rollers. Watch and listen to winch for proper
 Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
 Always take your time when using a winch. snugness.
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening during
operation and when spooling.  Use the right equipment for the situation.  Never power hook through fairlead. Could cause
damage.
 Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Always  Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the
use a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk synthetic rope to slip through your hands when
protector on the anchor. handling the rope.
 Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to  Only the operator should handle the synthetic rope and
increase the length of a pull. remote control.
(Continued)  Think safety at all times.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and synthetic rope for 4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
rope shows excessive wear, frays, or damage. strap to the hook (if not attached).
Pulling Synthetic Rope 4

6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk
Winch Rope Hook Strap protector or choker-chain around the object.
2. Put on gloves.
WARNING!
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to  Never touch winch rope or hook while someone else
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power. is at the control switch or during winching operation.
 Never touch winch rope or hook while under tension
or under load.
5. Pull the synthetic rope to the anchor point. Pull out

enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor point. To
prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you
work. Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
Free Spool Lever
NOTE: 8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is critical clutch lever on the winch to engage.
to winching operations. An anchor must be strong enough NOTE:
to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged.
stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as possible. If no
natural anchors are available when recovering another 9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this located on the front fascia/bumper. Be careful not to
case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply let the remote control cord dangle in front of the
the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your winch. If you choose to control the winch from inside
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor point your vehicle, always pass the remote through a
that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the window to avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always
vehicle will move. This allows the synthetic rope to wind disconnect the remote control when not in use.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point
as far away as possible will provide the winch with its 11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
greatest pulling power. secured and free of debris before continuing with the
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk winching procedure.
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the 12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be neatly
strap or chain and through the hook, being careful not wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn). can cause damage to the synthetic rope.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector

10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the remote
control switch, slowly wind the rope until no slack
remains. Once the rope is under tension, stand well
clear of it and never step over it.
Clevis/D-Shackles Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum

NOTE:
 Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
 What to look for under load: The synthetic rope
must always spool onto the drum as indicated by
the drum rotation decal on the winch. As you
power-in, make sure the synthetic rope winds
evenly and tightly on the drum. This prevents the
outer rope wraps from drawing into the inner
wraps, binding and damaging the synthetic rope.
Heavy Blanket Over Rope No People Zones Avoid shock loads by using the control switch 4
In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy 14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on intermittently to take up rope slack. Shock loads
blanket or similar object over the rope. A heavy blan- and light tension already on the synthetic rope, begin can momentarily far exceed the winch and
ket can absorb energy should the synthetic rope winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the rope is synthetic rope ratings. During side pulls the
break. Place it on the rope midway between the winch winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. For synthetic rope tends to stack up at one end of the
and the anchor point. Do this before the rope is put additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be slowly drum. This stack can become large enough to
under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue pulling cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up
once tension is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove drive the vehicle, the winching operation is complete. winching if the synthetic rope comes close to the
the blanket, slack the tension on the rope first. tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack,
spool out that section of the rope and reposition it
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions
to the opposite end of the drum, which will free up
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
space for continued winching.
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare 15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is
where the spectators should not stand — never complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes and
behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the shift the transmission to PARK. Release tension in
synthetic rope or snatch block. Your situation may the synthetic rope.
have other "no people" zones.
Using The Remote Control

16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect from Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as RIGGING TECHNIQUES
the anchor. necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person handling the same distance as the full length of the remote control from Various winching situations will require application of
synthetic rope should walk the rope in and not let it the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and fore- other winching techniques. These could range from too
slide through the hand, control the winch at all times. finger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a
synthetic rope. Walk the synthetic rope towards the straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what
fairlead, carefully spooling in the remaining rope by technique is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all
pulsing the remote control switch. times.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the How To Change The Pulling Direction
hawse fairlead.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers inside
the hook area as you are powering-in.
Change Pulling Directions
Hook In Stored Position
NOTE: All winching operations should have a straight line from
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote control 19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange the remote control cord from the control box and store in synthetic rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
synthetic rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. a clean and dry place. Winching operations are now pulling efficiency and damaging synthetic rope. A snatch
Be sure any synthetic rope already on the spooling drum is complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in. block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will
wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten NOTE: enable you to change your pulling direction while still
the layer if necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light Always store the remote control in a protected, clean, dry allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind properly
tension and spool the rope back and onto the winch drum area. onto the spooling drum.
in even layers.
Increasing Pulling Power HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING HYDRAULIC POWER S TEERING FLUID
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling
The standard power steering system will provide C HECK
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical
increased vehicle response and maneuverability in tight
advantage and that increases your pulling power. Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
Double Line capability if power assist is lost.
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these anticipated. Check fluid level when the engine is cold and
conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in off. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and dealer.
during parking maneuvers.
NOTE: WARNING! 4
 Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts
there is a problem with the power steering system. and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended power
 Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
steering fluid.
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
Wire Rope Routing is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal, and it does
Because pulling power decreases with the number of not in any way damage the steering system. CAUTION!
layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more rope. This decreases Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
CAUTION! system as the chemicals can damage your power
the number of layers of synthetic rope on the drum, and
increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end steering components. Such damage is not covered by
synthetic rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through a fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch possible. Damage to the power steering pump may If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
block, pull out enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor occur. level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure surfaces Ú page 448.
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system: dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
 Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
preset speed. control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead. To Set A Desired Speed
NOTE: Turn the Cruise Control on.
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled, Cruise Control Buttons When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
1 — SET (+)/Accel
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
selected. 2 — CANC/Cancel
speed.
3 — SET (-)/Decel
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time. NOTE:
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled, 4 — On/Off
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice 5 — RES/Resume
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
versa.
To Vary The Speed Setting
CRUISE C ONTROL To Activate
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h). pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of the SET (-) button.
button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
the steering wheel. off. The system should be turned off when not in use. U.S. Speed (mph)
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h) To Resume Speed NOTE:

 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of and release. Resume can be used at any speed above apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h. 20 mph (32 km/h). original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will following distance, while matching the speed of the
To Deactivate vehicle ahead.
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the instrument cluster display. button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
will deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
NOTE: the set speed from memory.
When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-) button,  Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
Control system without erasing the set speed from of the feature selected Ú page 454.
4
To Accelerate For Passing memory:
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to  Vehicle parking brake is applied WARNING!
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
 Stability event occurs  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
 Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
 Engine overspeed occurs
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
vehicle set speed. OFF position, erases the set speed from memory. most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) Your complete attention is always required while
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control. convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety sion and death or serious personal injury.
WARNING! system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise  The ACC system:
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system Control function performs differently Ú page 174.
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle (Continued)
snow-covered or slippery. directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- the Adaptive Cruise Control system. not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
tions into account, and may be limited upon Control Ready.”
adverse sight distance conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
 Does not always fully recognize complex driving When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing display will read “ACC SET.”
distance warnings.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
 Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while cluster display.
following a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
for approximately two seconds in the stop posi-
following ACC activity occurs:
tion. At this point, there will be an “ACC May
Cancel Soon” chime and warning to the driver.  System Cancel
When ACC is canceled, the system will release  Driver Override
the brakes and the driver must take over
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons  System Off
braking. The system can be resumed when
the vehicle ahead drives off by releasing the 1 — Distance Setting Increase  ACC Proximity Warning
brake and pushing the resume button on the 2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off  ACC Unavailable Warning
steering wheel.
3 — Distance Setting Decrease The instrument cluster display will return to the last
You should switch off the ACC system: display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
highway construction zones). The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
 When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when ACC system status. (32 km/h).
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
 When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. display: When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
Adaptive Cruise Control Off read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed. When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
NOTE: If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions: WARNING! (32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on (32 km/h).
 When in 4WD Low
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally NOTE:
 When the brakes are applied
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
 When the parking brake is applied You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave 20 mph (32 km/h).
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE the system off when you are not using it.
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
or NEUTRAL 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
 When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed To Set A Desired ACC Speed speed of the vehicle.
range NOTE:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
 When the brakes are overheated SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause 4
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds instrument cluster display will show the set speed. the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
 When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds NOTE: speed. If this occurs, the message “ACC Driver Over-
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC ride” will display in the instrument cluster display.
 When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
enabled. To change between the different modes, push  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
vehicle in close proximity
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed while ACC is enabled, the system will not control the
 When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off mode is Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
active Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) The vehicle speed will only be determined by the posi-
To Activate/Deactivate Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode. tion of the accelerator pedal.
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off WARNING! To Cancel
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
“ACC Ready.” In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not Cruise Control systems:
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive  The brake pedal is applied
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”  The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the  The trailer brake is applied manually (if equipped)
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
selected.
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
 The vehicle parking brake is applied NOTE: Metric Speed (km/h)

 The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates  While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
 The braking temperature exceeds normal the vehicle at a standstill.
range (overheated)  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
 ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system: in front of your vehicle in close proximity. button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds the instrument cluster display.
 Driver door is opened at low speeds WARNING! NOTE:
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
To Turn Off buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road vehicle.
if: conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or When ACC Is Active
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
pushed follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
or serious personal injury.
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position automatically slow the vehicle.
 4WD Low is engaged To Vary The Speed Setting  The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows
To Resume the vehicle in front to a standstill, your vehicle will
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by release the brakes two seconds after coming to a full
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing stop.
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
the SET (-) button.
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set  The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
speed. U.S. Speed (mph) uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h)  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used. a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph. is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h) speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
when ACC is active.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
normal range (overheated).
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance NOTE:
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
The specified following distance for Adaptive Cruise pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar warning for the driver to take action and does not mean
Control (ACC) can be set by varying the distance setting (shorter). that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the brakes autonomously.
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting
and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the Overtake Aid
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
displays in the instrument cluster display.
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
distance setting, regardless of the set speed. the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the the left hand side. 4
set speed.
ACC Operation At Stop
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
sensor.
following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will resume motion,
 The distance setting is changed. without any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts
 The system disengages. moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
Distance Settings seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
necessary.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
NOTE: A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system display and produce a warning chime. The driver must now
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) applies the brakes. manually operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
Increase button and release. Each time the button is flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
capacity. The driver must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should “CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
WARNING! examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the camera in the The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or center of the windshield, on the forward side of the
rearview mirror. when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
personal injury. to note the following maintenance items: become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
 Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear the wind- mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun
shield. and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
Display Warnings And Maintenance
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW Limited
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
have degraded performance.
VEHICLE” WARNING require a sensor realignment.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
 Do not attach or install any accessories near the
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
warning will display and a chime will sound when recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
conditions temporarily limit system performance. conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
malfunction.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt examine the windshield and the camera located on the
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
simply reactivating it.
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
and the system will deactivate. NOTE:
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in  If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
NOTE:
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path authorized dealer.
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
this warning may temporarily occur.  Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after- obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
NOTE: market grille or modifying the grille is not recom- camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still ACC/FCW operation.
available.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING TOWING A TRAILER TURNS AND BENDS

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC ACC is braking. the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. OFFSET DRIVING NOTE:
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
dealer. USING ACC ON HILLS
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Precautions While Driving With ACC to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills. 4
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
NOTE: ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
 Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift kits, and
steepness of the hill.
brush/grille bars can hinder module performance.
Ensure the radar/camera has no obstructions in the
field of view.
 Height modifications can limit module performance
and functionality.
 Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/
radar field of view.
 Any modifications to the vehicle that may obstruct the
field of view of the radar/camera are not recom-
mended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection Offset Driving Condition Example
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
ACC Hill Example
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
LANE CHANGING NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's distance to the vehicle ahead. stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing if necessary.
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY

IF EQUIPPED The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and the sensors’ field of view. indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and/ The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
or front fascia/bumper, and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
maneuver). the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The warning display will turn on indicating the system
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see NOTE: status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
Ú page 186. If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a 4
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
these gear selector positions, the system will remain 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
active until the vehicle speed is increased to horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will orientation of the obstacle.
appear in the instrument cluster display when the vehicle NOTE:
is in REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense
The dually flares are only protected when the vehicle is in
operating speed. The system will become active again if
REVERSE. There is no detection for the flares when the
the vehicle speed is decreased to less than approximately
vehicle is moving forward.
6 mph (9 km/h).
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is
detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Distance Greater than 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) 79 inches (200 cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Single 1/2 Second
Audible Alert Chime None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing 4
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense Camera Activation This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
If the ParkSense system detects an obstacle, a camera vehicle is in REVERSE.
image will display in the radio. The camera will continue to The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
display as long as the ParkSense system continues to Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
detect an object. This can be turned on or off in the The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
Uconnect system Ú page 226. the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear the sensors.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert momentarily, and then the LED will be on. PRECAUTIONS
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/ NOTE:
brake pedal is applied.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM  Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear ParkSense ParkSense system operating properly.
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
programmable through the Uconnect system
cluster display will show the "Front/Rear ParkSense affect the performance of ParkSense.
Ú page 226.
Unavailable Service Required" or the "Front/Rear
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message.  When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
The factory default volume is medium. tion and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle instrument cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle
ENABLING A ND D ISABLING F RONT graphic will show in the instrument cluster display, along graphic arcs. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for
with the display overlay “Wipe Sensors.” If the system
A ND/OR R EAR P ARKSENSE needs service, the display overlay will read “Service.”
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled radio when it is sounding a tone.
with the Front ParkSense switch. If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Rear ParkSense switch. obstructions, and then cycle the ignition. If the message Failure to do so can result in the system not working
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer. properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
display will show a vehicle graphic with an “Off” message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
overlay over the system that is off (Front or Rear system). authorized dealer.
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer CAUTION! applying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn
the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
sensor problem, causing the “Front/Rear ParkSense detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
Unavailable Service Required” message to appear in sensors will not be detected when they are in close the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
the instrument cluster display. proximity. lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
 On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense be provided.
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered NOTE:
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the 4
ParkSense. steering wheel and provides an audible and visual warning
WARNING! to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even when the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED does not return their hands to the wheel.
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, LANESENSE OPERATION TURNING LANESENSE ON O R O FF
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- The LaneSense button is located on the
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
serious injury or death. uses a forward-looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended NOTE:
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be When both lane markings are detected and the driver If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect Display
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no turn signal screen, the LaneSense button is located above the
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in has been applied OR the driver departs the lane on the display.
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because opposite side of the applied turn signal (if the left turn
signal is applied and the vehicle departs to the right), the To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the shown in the instrument cluster display.
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
size and shape, giving a false indication that an LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning
obstacle is behind the vehicle. through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected NOTE:
button again (LED turns on).  When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
NOTE: Telltale is solid white when only the left lane a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state marking has been detected and the system is ready to has been detected.
(on or off) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
placed in the ON/RUN position. display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
 When the LaneSense system is on and both the lane
the left side.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
markings have been detected, the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift approached and is in a lane departure situation, the display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an
condition through the instrument cluster display. visual warning in the instrument cluster display will unintentional lane departure occurs. The lane lines
show the left lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The turn from gray to white and the LaneSense telltale
 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to is solid green.
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
flashing yellow.
detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With

Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Green Telltale
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Yellow Telltale
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa- For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the NOTE:
tion, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense steering wheel will turn to the right.
 When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.  Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the  The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
steering wheel will turn to the right. whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
TURN SIGNAL A CTIVATED B LIND S POT

ASSIST — IF E QUIPPED 4
When enabled in the Uconnect system and a turn signal is
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With activated, the corresponding side view mirror camera will
Flashing Yellow Telltale display in the radio. The camera will continue to display as
long as the turn signal is engaged. If “Only With Trailer” is
NOTE: selected (if equipped), the camera will only display when a
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for trailer is connected to the vehicle Ú page 226.
a right lane departure.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With
WARNING!
Solid Yellow Telltale CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid to help detect objects in
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity the blind spot zones and may not provide alerts when
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity changing lanes under all driving conditions. Even if your
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. Uconnect system Ú page 226. your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in use turn signals before changing lanes. Failure to do so
the opposite direction of the lane boundary. can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be displayed
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an for up to 10 seconds after shifting to another gear, unless
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the Back Up Camera Touchscreen Button
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in
image will be displayed on the Uconnect display along with the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to disable
a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in the center through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu,
of the tailgate handle. and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph
NOTE: (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View Camera image will continue to be displayed until the display timer
function. exceeds 10 seconds.
Manual Activation Of The NOTE:
Rear View Camera If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button is
 If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), made available to indicate the current active Camera
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu- image being displayed whenever the Rear View Camera
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button, image is displayed.
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls placed in the OFF position. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to
menu. switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made
 The touchscreen X button to disable display of the available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear View camera image is made available ONLY when the displayed.
Camera system on. vehicle is not in REVERSE.
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the camera
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in
delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is exited and the REVERSE gear.
previous screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the Back
Up camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The corresponding settings can be adjusted
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center of the If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ CAUTION! gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE.
receiver. The following table shows the approximate  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven NOTE:
distances for each zone: slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
Distance To The Rear Of when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
Zones speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
The Vehicle the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
using ParkView.
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m) The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located in the For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see
6.5 ft or greater center of the tailgate handle. Ú page 199.
Green
(2 m or greater) NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — 4
WARNING!
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. IF EQUIPPED
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when Zoom View The Surround View Camera system allows you to see an
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always on-screen image of the surroundings and the Top View of
When the Rear View Camera image is being
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to your vehicle. This occurs whenever the gear selector is in
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, REVERSE or when enabled through the Uconnect system.
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any doors are
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and open. The image will be displayed on the Uconnect display
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
must continue to pay attention while backing up. along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”.
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
View Camera system is comprised of four cameras located
to the standard Back Up Camera display.
in the front grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
CAUTION! NOTE:
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the  Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
 To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Camera function.
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your Zoom View selection will automatically resume.  The Surround View Camera system has programmable
drive path. Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
(Continued) selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle system Ú page 226.
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Press this button on the touchscreen to enter Modes Of Operation NOTE:

the Surround View Camera menu in the Standard Rear View can be manually activated by  Front tires will display on the image when the tires are
Uconnect system. selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls menu turned.
within the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View  Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image will
and Top View is the default view of the system. Top View appear distorted.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear  Top View will show which doors are open.
display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE. View and Front View in a split screen display. There are
 Open front doors will cancel the outside image.
The camera image will not display for 10 seconds if the integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow Top View Plus Rear View
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming This is the default view of the system in
position. The touchscreen X button disables the display of object. REVERSE and is always paired with the
the camera image. The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View screen will Top View of the vehicle with optional active
change based on vehicle options. If not equipped with a guidelines for the projected path when
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will
Cargo Camera or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Back Up enabled.
close and display the previous screen after shifting out of
REVERSE. Camera button will be displayed. If equipped with a Cargo Rear Cross Path View
Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are overlaid on The Rear Cross Path will give the driver a wider
Camera button will be displayed. If equipped with both a
the image in the Rear View to illustrate the width of the angle view of the Back Up Camera system. The
Cargo Camera and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/
vehicle. The view will also include the side view mirrors Top View will be disabled when this is selected.
Trailer Reverse Guidance button will be displayed.
and its projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position. Top View Plus Front View
There are different colored zones to indicate the distance The Front View will show what is immediately in
to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the following chart: front of the vehicle and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle.
Distance To The Rear Of
Zone
The Vehicle Front Cross Path View
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) The Front Cross Path will give the driver a wider
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) angle view of the front camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is selected.
6.5 ft or greater
Green
(2 m or greater)
ParkSense Camera View
Back Up Camera View Trailer Reverse Guidance Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
The Back Up Camera will provide a full screen selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
The Trailer Reverse Guidance will provide below 8 mph (13 km/h).
rear view with Zoom View.
a full screen view of the cargo area and
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
trailer.
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
NOTE: Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror Split are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the Back Up Camera view was selected through the Screen View button within the Trailer NOTE:
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear View Reverse Guidance screen will display a
screen will return to the Surround View menu. If the Back  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
split screen to allow the driver to see
Up Camera was manually activated through the Controls speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
both sides of the trailer at the same time.
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
This view allows the driver to pan
screen will return to the Controls menu. left/right to better frame the trailer in  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible. 4
Cargo Camera the image. Deactivation
The Cargo Camera will provide a full screen The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
view of the cargo area. NOTE: was activated automatically:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected through the  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Surround View screen; exiting out of the Trailer Reverse camera delay turned on, the camera image will
NOTE: Guidance screen will return to the Surround View screen. continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
Zoom View the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo Camera
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
screen will return to the Surround View screen. If the Cargo
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
Camera was manually activated through the Controls
gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the “magnifying disable the display of the camera image.
menu of the Uconnect display, exiting out of the display
screen will return to the Controls menu. glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
image will zoom in to four times the standard view. camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the mode is exited and the last known screen appears
standard Back Up Camera display. again.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it Activation Cargo Camera Zoom View
was activated manually from the Uconnect controls menu The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through When the Cargo Camera image is being
via the Surround View button, Back Up Camera button, the Uconnect settings by pressing the Cargo Camera displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
Cargo Camera button or Forward Facing Camera button: button, followed by the Dynamic Centerline button on the 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
 The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed touchscreen. position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
 Vehicle is shifted into PARK If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
will display any time the Cargo Camera image is displayed. screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
 Ignition is placed in the OFF position view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
 Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds Adjusting Centerline to the standard Cargo Camera display.
NOTE: To manually adjust the centerline, proceed as follows: When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera, Back Up 1. Press the Adjust Centerline button located in the REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is activated manually, bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display. will display the standard Cargo Camera view. If the vehicle
and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
methods for automatic activation are assumed. View selection will automatically resume.
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally
The camera delay system is turned off manually through or vertically. Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
the Uconnect Settings menu Ú page 226. selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE: Accept button to set the centerline to the newly
specified position. Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, Deactivation
(13 km/h).
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses. The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be
NOTE:
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is
authorized dealer. deactivated. It can also be manually deactivated through  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
the Uconnect Settings. speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the
 While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will not be
Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of
visible.
the pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth-wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center
of the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,
and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed.
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If Equipped Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped Blind Spot Assist Cameras — If Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view image of The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the driver in There are cameras located in the exterior mirrors to assist
the road ahead, along with tire lines to guide the driver backing up a trailer by providing adjustable camera views in blind spot detection by providing a wide camera view of
when driving on narrow roads. Tire lines can be activated/ of the trailer and surrounding area. The cameras are the selected side of the vehicle. The blind spot cameras
deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. mounted on the side mirrors and the images will be will work in the ON/RUN or ignition ON position. Press the
Activation displayed side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and touchscreen X button or the More Cams button to exit the
right camera images are swapped and mirrored on the screen. The Blind Spot Assist Cameras can also be
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in the touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind the activated with Turn Signal engagement, see Ú page 189
following ways: vehicle as though the driver is using the side mirrors. for more information.
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in the Activation Activation
Controls screen or Apps menu
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be activated by Press the Driver Blind Spot or Passenger Blind Spot
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button located in pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance button on the Back buttons by locating the Vehicle screen, then Cameras
4
the upper left corner of the Back Up camera display Up/Cargo Camera Display. screen.
Once activated, the camera image will remain on as long Deactivation Driver Blind Spot
as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera Pressing the Driver’s Blind Spot button will provide a full
Deactivation delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be screen view of the driver’s outside mirror camera.
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the following displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
Passenger Blind Spot
conditions: exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is Pressing the Passenger’s Blind Spot button will provide a
 The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except when full screen view of the passenger’s outside mirror camera.
a touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
camera image.
 The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed. WARNING!
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through manually
 The vehicle is shifted into PARK. activated Surround View, Back Up Camera, or Cargo Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position. Camera, the following deactivation conditions apply: using the Surround View Camera. Always check
 The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
NOTE:
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing Camera  The vehicle is shifted into PARK blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
image will be displayed until the touchscreen X button is
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
 The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
10 seconds result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION! TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED Set Up

The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes an
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View Camera
TRAILER SURROUND VIEW C AMERA installation kit with a Trailer Surround View Module and
four Trailer Surround View Cameras that must be installed
is unable to view every obstacle or object in your SYSTEM on your trailer prior to connecting to your vehicle. See the
drive path. installation instructions included with the Trailer Surround
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows you to
View installation kit for more information.
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven see an on-screen image of the surroundings and the
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop Top View of a trailer using four mountable cameras. NOTE:
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended This occurs whenever the More Cams button is The trailer will be connected to the vehicle via the 12-way
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder selected, or when enabled through the Uconnect system. connector, and the installation location varies for Conven-
when using Surround View. The image will be displayed on the Uconnect display along tional or Gooseneck trailers.
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”. For Conventional trailers, the connection from the rear
After five seconds, this note will disappear. fascia goes to the receptacle in the bumper.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box: NOTE:
 The bottom wedge of the Top View will be displayed in  Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only available for
black. vehicles equipped with the Surround View Camera
system.
 The Rear Cross Path button will be grayed out.
 The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
 The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top View/Rear
programmable settings that may be selected through
View and Full Screen of Back Up Camera view.
the Uconnect system Ú page 226.
 Black video will be displayed for the right side of the
Top and Rear View, and full screen of the Back Up
Camera view when the Rear View Camera is not
connected.
To access all camera options when the vehicle is in Conventional Trailer Connection
REVERSE, select the More Cams button on the surround
view screen. 1 — Rear Fascia Connector
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see 2 — Receptacle
Ú page 199.
For Gooseneck trailers, the connection from the rear can be accessed through Uconnect Settings by pressing Activation
fascia goes to the rear chassis inline. the Trailer button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated through the
Settings. The system requires input of the trailer Uconnect system when the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL,
dimensions prior to use of the system. or DRIVE.
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, Surround View
 If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimensions have Camera showing the Top View and Back Up Camera is the
not been entered in the Trailer Surround settings page, default view of the system. Press the More Cams button
the system will default to the settings page. and press the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
Press Trailer Surround Camera button to access Top View
 If a trailer is not connected and any button is selected,
and Rear View of the trailer.
a message will appear: “Connect Trailer Equipped With
Trailer Surround View System”. If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will
display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE. 4
Inputting Trailer Values
The camera image will not display for 10 seconds if the
For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to function, vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
Gooseneck Trailer Connection all fields must be entered. When a value is needed the shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
1 — Rear Chassis Inline screen will display “Required”. position. The touchscreen X button disables the display of
2 — Rear Fascia Connector the camera image.
Setting Description
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will
Input the total length of
NOTE: Trailer Length close and display the previous screen after shifting out of
the trailer
REVERSE.
 When the 12-way connector goes to the rear chassis, Input the total width of
there is a black cap on the bumper receptacle for Trailer Width Modes Of Operation
the trailer
protection. The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers two
Input the height of the different camera displays:
 In order to make the connection from the rear chassis Camera Height
mounted camera
to the bumper, the cap must be unplugged from the  Top View split screen with one selected mounted
bumper and put on the rear chassis after making the Choose the trailer type camera
Trailer Type
12-way connection and vice versa. from menu
 Full screen view of a selected mounted camera
Once the Trailer Surround View Module and cameras are Press the More Cams button on the Surround View screen
installed and the trailer is connected to the vehicle via the When the Trailer Type button is selected two options are
and select the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
12-way connector, the Trailer Surround Camera settings available: Conventional or Gooseneck/Fifth Wheel.
Press Trailer Surround Camera button to access the
can be accessed. The Trailer Surround Camera settings default Top View and Rear View of the trailer.
Top View Left View vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Pressing the Left View button will give the driver the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
Top View and Rear View in a split screen display. a wider angle view of the left side trailer disable the display of the camera image.
camera and is paired with the Top View of the  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
trailer. camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround View
Right View Camera mode is exited and the last known screen
appears again.
Pressing the Right View button will give the
driver a wider angle view of the right side trailer The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
camera and is paired with the Top View of the was activated manually from the Uconnect controls menu
trailer. via the Trailer Surround Camera button:
Full Screen Camera View  The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed
To display a full screen image of the Trailer Surround View  Vehicle is shifted into PARK
mounted cameras, select one of the following options  Ignition is placed in the OFF position
from the Trailer Cameras screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right,  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View Trailer Front or Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen
view will return the system to the previous screen. NOTE:
NOTE: If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated manually, and
Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear NOTE: the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation methods
distorted. If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected through the for automatic activation are assumed.
More Cameras menu, an option to return to the More
Rear View The camera delay system is turned off manually through
Cameras menu will display. If the Trailer Surround Camera
Pressing the Rear View button will show the was manually activated through the Controls menu of the the Uconnect system Ú page 226.
Top View and Rear View in a split screen Uconnect system, exiting out of the display screen will NOTE:
display. return to the Controls menu.
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
Deactivation the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
Front View
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
Pressing the Front View button will show you was activated automatically:  If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
what is immediately in front of the trailer and is
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with authorized dealer.
paired with the Top View of the trailer.
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Activation The screen can be exited out by pressing the touch-

WARNING! screen X button in the upper right hand corner. This will
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the Back Up
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped) button on the return the display back to the previously displayed
using the Trailer Surround View Camera. Always check touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in the screen.
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for upper left corner of the rearview display. On vehicles with  Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or Surround View Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can feature.
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for be activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first  The display will always default to the Trailer Camera
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pressing the More Cams button in the Surround view display AUX 1.
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX camera can also
result in serious injury or death. be activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing
the AUX button. ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting diesel 4
CAUTION! between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or AUX 2 engines, where the engine consumes its own lubrication
buttons on the Trailer Camera display. oil and runs at higher and higher RPM until it overspeeds
 To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround View
to a point where it destroys itself due to either mechanical
should only be used as a parking aid. The Trailer
failure or engine seizure through lack of lubrication.
Surround View Camera is unable to view every
AUX 1 Camera Button
obstacle or object in your drive path.
WARNING!
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Trailer Surround View to be able to In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom- AUX 2 Camera Button from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks being sucked
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her into the engine, do the following to help avoid personal
shoulder when using Trailer Surround View. injury and/or vehicle damage:
 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
AUX CAMERA Deactivation
 Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extinguisher,
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX direct the spray from the fire extinguisher into the
touchscreen X button in the upper right corner of the
Cameras, which display rear view and side view images grille on the driver side so that the spray enters the
touchscreen. This will return the display back to the
from the trailer on the touchscreen. engine air intake.
previously displayed screen.
NOTE: NOTE: The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind the
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles with NAV driver’s side headlamp and receives air through the
equipped radios if the vehicle is not equipped with a  If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera is grille.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) and Surround connected, the touchscreen will display a blue screen
View Camera system. along with the message “Camera System Unavailable.”
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE  Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened prop- CAUTION!
ENGINE erly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if
the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise. WARNING!
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the WARNING!
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
 Always place container on the ground before filling.
being filled.
 Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
 Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
when you are filling it.
running.
 Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
 A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be  Do not leave container unattended while filling.
burned. Always place gas containers on the ground
 A static electric charge could cause a spark and
while filling.
fire hazard.
Fuel Filler Cap

CAUTION! LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE
1. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
 Damage to the fuel system or emissions control If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
2. Fill the vehicle with fuel. system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
3. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close filler tube cap. loose gASCAP indicator will display in the instrument
fuel filler door.  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into cluster telltale display area Ú page 104. Tighten the fuel
NOTE: the fuel system. filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
 When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in  A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the appear the next time the vehicle is started.
the hook, located on the fuel filler door. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank (Continued)
is full.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE NOTE:

In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel, once
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx
(oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are harmful
1. Open the fuel filler door. refueled, place the ignition in the ON position for 30 to our health and the environment to a near-zero level.
seconds, then turn the ignition OFF and wait 30 seconds. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected
Repeat this procedure three times, prior to cranking the into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when
engine. vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
WARNING! natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is generations to come.
being filled.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
System Overview 4
violation of most state and federal fire regulations This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to injection system and a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
turn on. catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
Fill Locations
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable The DEF injection system consists of the following
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location components:
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground  DEF tank
while filling.  DEF pump
NOTE:
 DEF injector
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the filler
pipe seals the system. CAUTION!  Electronically-heated DEF lines
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the  DEF control module
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while fuel tank after filling.  NOx sensors
refueling.
 Temperature sensors
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID  SCR catalyst
 UQS Sensor
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel For system messages and warnings Ú page 104.
emissions standards required by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
NOTE: Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid

 Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster) will
You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise. display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
This is normal operation. Ú page 104.
 The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine NOTE:
shutdown to purge the DEF system. This is normal
operation.  Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.)
will affect the amount of DEF that is used in your
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable  Another factor is that outside temperature can affect
product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in DEF consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C)
temperatures between 10°F and 90°F (-12°C and 32°C), and below, the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed Fill Locations
it will last a minimum of one year. position and may not move for extended periods of 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. time. This is a normal function of the system.
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or  There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank that
below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to automatically works when necessary. If the DEF supply
operate in this environment. does freeze, the truck will operate normally until it NOTE:
NOTE: thaws.  The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to update
When working with DEF, it is important to know that: after adding a gallon or more of DEF to the DEF tank. If
DEF FILL PROCEDURE you have a fault related to the DEF system, the gauge
 Any containers or parts that come into contact with may not update to the new level. See an authorized
DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 446. dealer for service.
steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless
steel should be avoided as they are subject to corro-  The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side of the
sion by DEF. a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is below 12°F
vehicle or in fuel door).
(-11°C). The DEF tank heater will possibly warm up the
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely. DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
 At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase in the DEF Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
gauge due to the tank thawing. The gauge and level CAUTION!
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your
sensor are working properly and are just updating with  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating
proper thawed DEF. (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
 Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in a MIL temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however, properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your
lamp/fault code and inaccurate level readings. if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could vehicle is not in operation for an extended period of time
Refilling With Nozzles be damaged. with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the
tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.  When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with
could be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank.
water and use an absorbent material to soak up the
Proceed as follows: spills on the ground. Extra care should be taken when filling with portable
 Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler tube, start refilling and containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF
stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates
 Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is acciden- gauge in your instrument cluster. You may safely add a 4
tally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in maximum of 2 gallons (7.5 liters) of DEF from portable
that the DEF tank is full). DO NOT proceed with the
severe damage to your engine, including but not containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.
 Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
 Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
VEHICLE LOADING
Proceed as follows: fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING
 Check the expiration date. petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount
of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than (GVWR)
 Read the advice for use on the label before pouring the 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the
content of the bottle into the DEF tank. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
entire DEF system and will require replacement.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
 After the indication appears on the instrument cluster If owners use a container, funnel or nozzle when
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
display Ú page 104 fill the DEF tank with no more than refilling the tank, it should either be new or one that
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
4 gallons (15 liters). has only been used for adding DEF. Mopar® provides
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION! PAYLOAD
 To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF splashes or
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF wells back in the filler neck.
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
tank after filling. Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube. all passengers, options and cargo.
(Continued)
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) LOADING TRAILER TOWING

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear In this section you will find safety tips and information on
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. possible.
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
components sometimes specified by purchasers for be determined separately to be sure that the load is follow the requirements and recommendations in this
increased durability do not necessarily increase the properly distributed over the front and rear axles. manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
vehicle's GVWR. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axle has been exceeded but the total load COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
TIRE SIZE is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the The following trailer towing-related definitions will assist
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents you in understanding the following information:
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
RIM S IZE Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size the brakes operate.
listed. exceed the GVWR Ú page 203.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
I NFLATION P RESSURE WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR,
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
maximum Payload or the maximum front and rear
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
ready for operation" condition.
CURB W EIGHT can change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can shorten the The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of life of your vehicle. loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full trailer must be supported by the scale.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
WARNING!
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Distributing Hitch
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing your vehicle. heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose Trailer Frontal Area accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
control of your vehicle and cause a collision. The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
maximum width of the front of a trailer. brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
trailer when weighed in combination. installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight-distributing (load 4
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear swaying motions while traveling. and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles requirements.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
rear GAWR Ú page 203. WARNING!
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
WARNING!
Weight-Carrying Hitch system may reduce handling, stability and braking
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum performance and could result in a collision.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some  Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
of the vehicle and have a collision. other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
sized trailers. Vehicle dealer for additional information.
2. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel

opening on the fender to the ground, this is height H1.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH

ADJUSTMENT Measuring Height (H)
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer). 4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground, this is height H2.
NOTE:
Standard Ride Height (SRH) or Alternate Trailer Height 5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
(ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine distributing bars per the manufacturers’ recommen-
running position while attaching a trailer for proper dations so that the height of the front fender is
leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly difference between H2 and H1 above Standard Ride
loaded. Height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight NOTE:
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s distribution bars connected. For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
recommendations have been met. 4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Example 2500/3500
opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2. Fifth-Wheel Hitch
Measurement Example 5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
Height (mm)
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s recommen- coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
H1 1030 dations so that the height of the front fender is in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
H2 1058 approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the trailer with a coupling king pin.
difference between H2 and H1 above Standard Ride
H2-H1 28 Height [H1]). Your truck may be equipped with a fifth-wheel hitch option.
Refer to the separately provided fifth-wheel hitch safety,
(H2-H1)/2 14 6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044 weight-distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s
care, assembly, and operating instructions. 4
recommendations have been met. Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
NOTE: Example 2500/3500 which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with Measurement Example
Height (mm) truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
TOW/HAUL mode engaged. over the rear axle in the truck bed.
H1 1030
Towing With All Other 2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspension)
H2 1058
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer). H2-H1 28
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel (H2-H1)/2 14
opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1. (H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your
intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 37,100 lb (16,828 kg) / 5,565 lb (2,524 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the weight
your vehicle. on the rear axle of the vehicle:
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM  The tongue weight of the trailer.

 The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS) in or on your vehicle.
NOTE:  The weight of the driver and all passengers.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight NOTE:
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
 ramtrucks.com/towing/towing-guide to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. For
 rambodybuilder.com the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
Weight Distribution for your vehicle Ú page 420.
TRAILER REVERSE STEERING connecting a trailer, you will see a “Calibrate Trailer” 0 — When the vehicle is not in Reverse, press the TRSC
message in the instrument cluster when pressing the button while at a standstill. A “Calibrate Trailer” message
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED TRSC button to activate the system. The TRSC button is will display.
located above the TRSC knob. If this is the case, perform 1 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m). A “Calibrating Trailer”
Feature Overview
the following maneuver to calibrate the trailer: message will display when vehicle is in motion.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a feature that
Drive forward at least 100 ft (30 m), perform a 90 degree 2 — Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
will assist the driver when backing up a trailer. Use the
turn and return to a straight position for at least another (15-20 m) in either direction.
TRSC knob, located on the center stack, to more
100 ft (30 m). Perform another 90 degree turn, followed 3 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
accurately control the direction of the trailer.
by another straight drive of at least 100 ft (30 m). Check 4 — Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
The driver controls the accelerator and brake while using that the system has calibrated by pushing the TRSC (15-20 m) in either direction.
the TRSC knob to steer. The trailer is steered according to button.
5 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
the direction the knob is turned.
NOTE: 6 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m), making sure to align 4
This feature will also allow the driver to back up a vehicle The 90 degree turns could be in either the left or right vehicle/trailer to path center line.
and trailer in a straight line when the knob is in the center direction. 7 — Once calibration is complete, feature will be available
position.
for use. For calibration runs under 30mph (48 km/h) a
Minimal setup is required to use this feature. “To Enable Trailer Steering Shift to P” message will
Set Up: appear to indicate calibration completion.
To use the system, attach your trailer to the truck and

ensure all electrical wiring is connected Ú page 215. Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist will be
unavailable during the calibration procedure.
Make sure that the cable is secured out of the camera
Instead of the Blind Spot camera view, an
view and does not interfere with any part of the rear-view
image showing the unavailable feature will
image as it may impact system performance.
display on the radio screen when the turn signal is used.
During normal forward driving, the system will
automatically calibrate the attached trailer provided that NOTE:
the driving incorporates calibration maneuvers such as Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist will function
normally during automatic calibration.
going straight and 90-degree turns. If the vehicle has not Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
had enough time to automatically calibrate after
Using TRSC Continue to control the accelerator and brake while Instrument Cluster Messages:
backing the trailer up. The following graphics will display  “Calibrate Trailer” will display when a trailer is not cali-
CAUTION! on the radio screen to warn the user if the trailer is brated and the vehicle is at a standstill while the button
approaching a jackknife angle. Left or right zones in the is pushed.
Always observe the position of the trailer and graphic will change color based on which side the event
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to avoid occurs.  “Calibrating Trailer” will display when the trailer is not
damage to the truck or trailer. calibrated and the vehicle is moving while the button is
An orange arch will display when approaching a pushed.
jackknife angle.
 “To Enable Trailer Steering Shift To P” will display when
the trailer is calibrated successfully, the TRSC activa-
A red arch will display when reaching the tion button is pushed, vehicle speed is less than
jackknife angle. 30 mph (48 km/h) and the vehicle is not in PARK. This
message will also display if calibration maneuver is
performed successfully under 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!  “Press Trailer Steering To Begin” will display if vehicle

is shifted to PARK from any other gear within 5 seconds
Continuing after the red warning may lead to damage to of the “To Enable Trailer Steering Shift To P” message
the vehicle and/or trailer. appearing.
 “Trailer Steering Ready Shift To R And Use Knob To
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob NOTE: Steer Trailer” will display when trailer is calibrated,
While active, TRSC will automatically disable the Rear Park vehicle is in PARK and the TRSC activation button is
To use the system, place the gear selector in PARK. Push
Assist system if it was previously enabled. pushed. The message may also appear when feature is
the TRSC button located above the TRSC knob in the
active and vehicle is shifted to DRIVE/NEUTRAL from
center stack. The LED on the button will glow solid and the The TRSC system will limit the top speed your vehicle can REVERSE.
instrument cluster display will direct you to shift to travel in REVERSE while using the feature. If needed, you
REVERSE. Once in REVERSE the system is active. Remove can shift to DRIVE or NEUTRAL to pull forward to get more  “Trailer Steering Active Check Surrounding Backup
hands from the steering wheel and slowly back up while room or straighten out the trailer, and shift back to Slowly” will display after the driver shifts to REVERSE
turning the TRSC knob in the direction you want the trailer REVERSE without the need to reactivate the feature. and indicates the feature is active.
to go. A trajectory line will show the intended path of the  “Calibration Failed See User Manual” will display when
The feature will cancel after 30 seconds in DRIVE or when
trailer on the radio display. Turning the knob clockwise will calibration has failed during an active calibration
the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph (12 km/h).
cause the trailer to turn right. Turning the knob attempt.
counterclockwise will cause the trailer to turn left. If you To cancel out of the feature, come to a stop and shift to
release the knob, it will return to its center position, and PARK, or push the TRSC activation button.  “Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if there is a
the trailer will back up in a straight line. fault in the system preventing activation or the driver’s
door is open with the driver’s seat belt unbuckled.
 “Trailer Steering Unavailable Trailer Angle Too Steep” NOTE: The following are guidelines for attaching the stickers to
will display when trailer is calibrated, the TRSC button your trailer:
 If the trailer is not identified, drive forward to align the
is pressed and the trailer is at a jackknife angle.
trailer to the vehicle in a straight line, 0 degree trailer
 “Trailer Steering Canceled Hands On Wheel Detected” angle, and shift to PARK. Ensure that there is no
will display when driver overrides steering wheel input. camera feed displayed on the radio screen and wait for
 “Trailer Steering Canceled Trailer Not Found” will up to 10 seconds for the system to attempt to identify
display when sufficient trailer data cannot be esti- the trailer. Press TRSC button to activate the feature.
mated using camera for TRSC to continue functioning.  Trailers may look different during day and night condi-
 “Trailer Steering Canceled Vehicle Speed Too High” will tions. In such cases, the trailer may need to recalibrate.
display when vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h)  Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to recali-
while the feature is active in REVERSE. System will limit brate while loaded and unloaded.
the speed in REVERSE and prevent feature cancellation 4
 The system may not detect a trailer in low light condi-
due to this event.
tions. In sunny conditions, the performance may be
“Trailer Steering Canceled” will display when the degraded as shadows pass over the trailer. Gooseneck Trailer
maneuver is canceled due to any of the following reasons:
 The driver is always responsible for safe operation of 1 — 1st Option Decal Placement
 Trailer tracking is lost. truck and trailer. 2 — 2nd Option Decal Placement
 TRSC button is pushed while active.  The driver is always in control of the truck as well as the
 Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h) in DRIVE. trailer and is responsible for controlling the accelerator
and brakes.
 Driver door is open and seat belt is unbuckled.
 The system may not function when the camera lens is
 Transmission is shifted to PARK. blocked, blurred (covered with water, snow, ice, dirt,
Trailer Memory etc) and will not work unless the tailgate is upright and
The trailer steering system will automatically retain the fully latched.
calibration of the previous five trailers connected, so Trailer Sticker
recalibration will not be necessary when hooking up a As there are many variations of trailers on the market you
previously calibrated trailer. may encounter one that is particularly difficult to use with
To store a trailer to memory, calibrate the trailer and then the TRSC. High-contrast stickers have been provided to be
allow the vehicle to be off for a minimum of 2 minutes. placed on the trailer for when this scenario is
The next time the vehicle is started the trailer system will encountered. By applying these stickers to your trailer, it Gooseneck Trailer
attempt to identify the attached trailer. If successful, the aids the vision system with learning the trailer by providing
1 —Decal Placement
TRSC system can then be activated. high contrast features to track in the rear camera image.
6. POST APPLICATION: Do not power wash decal area for

72 hours. WARNING!
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
TOWING REQUIREMENTS load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain loss of control, poor performance or damage to
components, the following guidelines are recommended. brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
CAUTION!  Safety chains must always be used between your
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
or other parts could be damaged. under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
Enclosed Gooseneck Trailer turning corners.
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
1 — Decal Placement  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
1. TRAILER SURFACE: Surface temperature should be engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
between 70°F and 90°F during decal application to heavier loads. PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
ensure proper adhesive bond. transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
2. ALCOHOL WIPE: Wipe the body surface with a clean, Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
lint-free cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to Servicing” Ú page 369. When towing a trailer, never  GCWR must not be exceeded.
remove contaminants. exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.  Total weight must be distributed between the tow
3. LINER REMOVAL: Use tab on decal to remove the liner vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
exposing the adhesive. WARNING! ratings are not exceeded:
4. LOCATING THE DECALS: Use photos to determine the  Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer  GVWR
style of trailer. Place one decal on both sides of the and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
trailer as shown. To get ideal functionality, place that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can  GTW
decals at the same height of the camera and at each occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.  GAWR
vertical edge of the trailer without going over. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
5. PRESSURIZING THE DECAL: Use firm hand pressure
over entire decal starting at the center and fanning (Continued)
out to the edges trying not to trap air.
Towing Requirements — Tires WARNING!

 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing system and cause it to fail. You might not have
while using a full size spare tire. brakes when you need them and could have an
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe accident.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Ú page 416.
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
before trailer usage. tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
before towing a trailer Ú page 416. dent. Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) 4
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
 For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 416. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying 2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
CAUTION! 3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limits. If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
The user interface consists of the following:
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal Manual Brake Control Lever
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. effort, and longer stopping distances. Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
This could cause inadequate braking and possible power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the
personal injury. tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) — activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- If Equipped two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Electric The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on when
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal. Only the
brake controller is not required. trailer stop lamps will come on when the manual brake
NOTE:
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over control lever is applied.
This module has been designed and verified with electric
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems.
of 2,000 lb (907 kg). Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible
with ITBM.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light Adjusting GAIN 5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status. NOTE: “TRAILER TOW”.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is This should only be performed in a traffic free environment 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h). Type appears on the screen.
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Disconnected condition, functioning normally and properly buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears
Warning Light will not be displayed. adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary. on the screen.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, the 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light will flash. connections according to the trailer manufacturer's level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) instructions. and squeeze the manual brake control lever
completely.
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN the trailer connected message should appear in the 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or instrument cluster display (if the connection is not tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
GAIN correct type of trailer must be selected from the just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for instrument cluster display options. trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
the specific towing condition and should be changed as 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel maximum GAIN setting of 10.
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Electric Over Hydraulic Electric Over Hydraulic
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Trailer Brakes Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also
affect the selection.
Display Messages NOTE: The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
 An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single Refer to the following illustrations.
trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To deter-
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined mine the type of brakes on your trailer and the avail- NOTE:
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the ability of controllers, check with your trailer  Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
trailer Ú page 104. manufacturer or dealer. (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
 Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause connectors) before launching a boat into water.
WARNING! damage to the electrical system and electronic  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the modules of the vehicle. See an authorized dealer if an
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of aftermarket module is to be installed.
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
distance or trailer instability which could result in 4
personal injury. Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
CAUTION! motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
connector.
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in NOTE:
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring Four-Pin Connector
harness. 1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
When activated the feature will enable all of the exterior The sequence will only activate if the following conditions
lights sequentially for up to five minutes for time to walk are met:
around and verify functionality. The following exterior  Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package
lights will remain on for the entirety of the sequence:
 Vehicle is in PARK
 Park/Running Lamps
 Vehicle is not in motion
 Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
 Ignition in ACC or RUN
 License Lamp
 Remote start is inactive
 Signature Lamp (if equipped)
 Brakes are not applied
 Low Beams
 Left turn signal is not applied
Seven-Pin Connector  Fog Lamps (if equipped)
 Right turn signal not applied
 Daytime Running Lamps
1 — Backup Lamps  Hazard switch is not applied
During this time the following lights will sequence, each
2 — Running Lamps The sequence will cancel if any of the following conditions
activating for three seconds:
3 — Left Stop/Turn occur:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
4 — Ground  Brakes are applied
5 — Battery 2. Left turn signal
 Vehicle is shifted from PARK
6 — Right Stop/Turn 3. Right turn signal
 Vehicle is no longer stationary
7 — Electric Brakes 4. Reverse Lamps
 Left turn signal activated from stalk
5. High Beam
Trailer Light Check  Right turn signal is activated from stalk
This light check sequence will continue for a total of
This feature will run the trailer lights through a sequence five minutes.  Hazard switch is activated
to check the trailer light function. It is available in the  Any button on the key fob is pushed
instrument cluster under the Trailer Tow menu  Ignition button is pushed
Ú page 109.
 High Beam stalk position is changed
 Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
TOWING TIPS Cruise Control — If Equipped There are unique electrical systems that must be
connected to properly ensure operator safety and prevent
 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and overloading vehicle systems.
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
traffic. drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until WARNING!
you can get back to cruising speed.
Automatic Transmission Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The maximize fuel efficiency.
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent Air Suspension System earlier in this manual.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select [ERS] shift control).
the air suspension system can be used Ú page 155.
CAUTION! 4
NOTE:
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running position The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air lamps are not properly installed.
(using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle suspension system.
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
BEFORE PLOWING
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide SNOWPLOW
better engine braking.  Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory fluid level.
Tow/Haul Mode installed option. These packages include components
 Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission tightness.
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-  Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to
Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift control) on more
recommendations contained within the current Body 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
severe grades.
Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer, installer or  Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
snowplow manufacturer for this information. tioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is GENERAL MAINTENANCE
parked.
AVAILABILITY Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
equipment following the recommendations provided by plow manufacturer's instructions.
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builder’s the specific snowplow manufacturer. Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
Guide. terminals clean and free of corrosion.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION W ITH When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two. S NOWPLOW ATTACHED damage, the following precautions should be observed.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the  Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when plowing
should never be exceeded. engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
completely and position it as low as road or surface 4WD HIGH.
options or passengers, etc.
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).  Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow The operator should always maintain a safe stopping 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy snow for
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, distance and allow adequate passing clearance. extended periods of time to avoid transmission over-
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross heating.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight Rating OPERATING T IPS  Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
(GAWR). These weights are specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label on the driver's side door Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h) returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
opening. should be maximum operating speed. The operator should practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting
be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. the transmission.
NOTE: Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing
Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers. unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without consideration for the
weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked
and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in N (Neutral)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED 4
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 155. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to
be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL CAUTION! CAUTION!

DRIVE MODELS  Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may  Before recreational towing, the transfer case must
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will leak from the transmission, causing damage to be in N (Neutral). To be certain the transfer case is
result. internal parts. fully in N (Neutral), perform the procedure outlined
under “Shifting Into N (Neutral)”. Internal transmis-
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is sion damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. RECREATIONAL TOWING — N (Neutral) during towing.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  The transmission must be placed in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
NOTE: NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases  Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
vehicle is set to Standard Ride Height. must be shifted into N (Neutral) for recreational towing. requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for transfer case damage. Damage from improper
the dolly manufacturer's instructions. recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for your Warranty.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. vehicle.
 Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
transmission in PARK. CAUTION!
internal parts.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following  DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.  Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob. cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.  Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
CAUTION! the transfer case.
 Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will (Continued)

cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
Shifting Into N (Neutral) 4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral): 11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the
 With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for Remove the key fob from the ignition.
recreational towing. case lever into N (Neutral).
 With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold 12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
WARNING! the transfer case N (Neutral) button. Some models tow bar.
have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of 13. Release the parking brake.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the transfer case switches) that must be pushed
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NOTE:
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the With electronic shift transfer case:
models have a rectangular N (Neutral) switch,
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
below the rotary transfer case control knob. The  Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must be met
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
N (Neutral) indicator light will blink while the shift before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and must
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on continue to be met until the shift has been completed. 4
solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete. If any of these requirements are not met before
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) pushing the N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
vehicle.
light stays on, release the N (Neutral) button. during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
CAUTION! 6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure take place and for the position indicator lights to be
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before that there is no vehicle movement. operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
DRIVE. will be on or flashing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, 9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the  A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates
with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking parking brake. Turn off the engine. For vehicles with that shift requirements have not been met.
brake. Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push and hold the ENGINE  If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off. engine should be started and left running for a
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
NOTE: least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air
transmissions the shifter will automatically select
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to
PARK when the engine is turned off.
vehicle is set to Standard Ride Height. compensate for temperature effects.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral) NOTE: NOTE:

When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral), turning the With electronic shift transfer case:
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
engine off is not required, but may be helpful to avoid gear  Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met
normal usage:
clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the before pushing the button to shift out of N (Neutral),
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it engine must remain running, since turning the engine off and must continue to be met until the shift has been
connected to the tow vehicle. will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission completed. If any of these requirements are not met
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of before pushing the button or are no longer met during
NEUTRAL). the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash contin-
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic transmission into uously until all requirements are met or until the button
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will is released.
NEUTRAL. automatically select PARK when the engine is turned  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
 With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer off. take place and for the position indicator lights to be
case lever to the desired position. 6. Release the brake pedal. operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
 With electronic shift transfer case with rotary 7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
selector switch, push and hold the transfer case N will be on or flashing.
(Neutral) button until the N (Neutral) indicator light 8. Start the engine.
 A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates
turns off. After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. that shift requirements have not been met.
off, release the N (Neutral) button. After the N
(Neutral) button has been released, the transfer
case will shift to the position indicated by the 11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
selector switch. pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
 With electronic shift transfer case with push
button selector switch, push and hold the switch
for the desired transfer case position, until the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off and the desired
position indicator light turns on.
DRIVING TIPS DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
Driving through water more than a few inches/
DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery Flowing/Rising Water WARNING!
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to  Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a WARNING!
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is when driving through standing water.
wheels. flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
 Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
WARNING! your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
braking capabilities, which increases stopping 4
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully passengers, and others around you.  Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). others around you.
CAUTION! OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
 Always check the depth of the standing water before Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
driving through it. Never drive through standing or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural the values specified in the Service Manual.
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,  Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
mounted on the vehicle. choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible. things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
 Determine the condition of the road or the path that cautiously. propeller shafts.
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water. If you must back down a hill, back straight down using  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
 Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through across the hill. rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
standing water. This will minimize wave effects. and cleaned as soon as possible.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
 Driving through standing water may cause damage to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always to avoid spinning the wheels. WARNING!
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis- Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving. Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
After Driving Off-Road excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
through standing water. Do not continue to operate Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
may result in further damage. Such damage is not a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any necessary.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause ready when you need it.
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal  Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. exhaust system for damage.
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as correct the situation.
required.
225
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.  ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect 5 NAV With Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
12-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and contain malicious software, and if installed in your
Instruction Manual. takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized systems to be breached.
NOTE:
dealer immediately, Ú page 449, or refer to your
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
information.
CYBERSECURITY The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your

vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent NOTE:
5
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is To help further improve user experience, features,
send or receive information from a wired or wireless installed. stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
network. This information allows systems and features in breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
your vehicle to function properly. www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
226 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow For The Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, The Uconnect
you to access and change the Customer Programmable 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, And The Uconnect 5 NAV
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle. With 12-inch Display
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside For Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on the side of
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument the faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect system allows
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob you to access all of the available programmable features.
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll For Uconnect 5, press the Vehicle button on the
through menus and change settings. Push the center of touchscreen, then press the Settings tab on the top of the
the control knob one or more times to select or change a touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect system allows
setting. you to access all of the available programmable features.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and NOTE:
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
 Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
may vary.
screen to turn the screen on.
When making a selection, press the button on the
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
certain option on the Uconnect system.
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a minimum of showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
15 seconds to reset the radio. is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And

Faceplate Buttons
MULTIMEDIA 227
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Language Display. The available languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano
(Italy), and Français (Canada).
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
Display Mode
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display 5
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
Units “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
Keyboard
“ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
228 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
Theme Mode “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
Control Screen Timeout
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Language Display. The available languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano
(Italy), and Français (Canada).
This setting will adjust the display brightness for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
Display Mode
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the
Display Brightness Headlights On
dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
MULTIMEDIA 229

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
Display Brightness Headlights Off setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
Units “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
Theme Mode “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights. 5
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
Time Format “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Wake Up” Word
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
Key Off Power Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec” and “45 sec”.
230 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Power Off When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
Radio Off With Door
opened.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
New Text Message Popups
options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
Missed Calls Message
are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are
Navigation Popups
“On” and “Off”.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Navigation Settings
Instruction Manual for further information.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings Ú page 245.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
MULTIMEDIA 231
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
Submenu
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
5
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This setting is
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
ParkSense
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
Front ParkSense Volume
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
Rear ParkSense Volume
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
232 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
Blind Spot Alert
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will have
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max” setting will always set the
length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The available options are
Power Side Steps “Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps and “Stow” to deactivate the Power
Side Steps.
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running,
Rear Seat Alert or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will
appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
This setting will allow you to enable or disable the front camera when an obstacle is
Front ParkSense Camera Activation
detected.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
Sync Time With GPS
the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
Set Time for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be 5
Time Format off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll
Set Date
through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
234 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
Enable Two Active Phones
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 235
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are
Wake Up Word
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
Voice Barge-In
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
Show Command List
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
236 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
Trailer Brake/Trailer — If Equipped

When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:

Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric,
Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and
Trailer 1
“Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
Trailer 2
Tire Settings).
MULTIMEDIA 237

Trailer 3
Tire Settings).
Trailer 4
Tire Settings).
Trailer Surround Camera This setting will let you access options related to the Trailer Surround Camera.
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations
Trailer Select
can be used to save different trailer settings.
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light 5
Trailer Brake Type Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over
Hydraulic”.
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
Trailer Name
equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility,
and 5th wheel.
238 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
Surround View Camera Delay
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
For vehicles not equipped with towing, this setting will allow you to enable or disable the
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot View turn signal blind spot view. For vehicles equipped with towing, the selectable options are
“Off”, “On”, or “Only with Trailer”.
MULTIMEDIA 239
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. 5
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
Auto Folding Side Mirors turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
240 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
Headlight Illumination On Approach after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
Flash Lights With Lock
on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options are
Steering Directed Lights
Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights This setting will turn the Rear Guidance Lights on when Cargo Lights are activated.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE: 5

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
Auto Door Locks
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
Flash Lights With Lock
on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
Sound Horn With Lock
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
242 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
Passive Entry
on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
to the key fob.
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems

When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seats
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 243
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when
the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the 5
Headlight Off Delay vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
244 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All”
Display Suspension Messages setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only display
warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system for flat towing.
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Contact an
Wheel Alignment Mode
authorized dealer for further information.
MULTIMEDIA 245
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
Balance/Fade — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
Speed Adjusted Volume — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, 5
and “3”.
Surround Sound — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
AUX Volume Offset — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available
Auto-On Radio — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With “Recall Last”, the system resumes the
previous task before vehicle shut off.
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone,
Volume Adjustment — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Loudness — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
246 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent.
Notification Sounds
The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connected
New Text Message Popups
phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected phone
Missed Calls Message
on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 247
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
Tune Start
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of 5
the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
Subscription Information
separate subscription.
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are
Block Explicit
248 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates — If Equipped

When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
Version Information
information about the version of your radio.
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
License Information
licensing information of your radio.
MULTIMEDIA 249
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
5
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
Clear Personal Data
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values for your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
250 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
MULTIMEDIA 251
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
Radio/Media
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 253.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
Phone
system Ú page 263.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on

the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
5
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
BACK Push the BACK button on the faceplate to go back to a previous screen in the headunit.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the MUTE/VOLUME button on the
MUTE/VOLUME
faceplate to mute or unmute the system.
252 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
COMPASS Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
MORE Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION  Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli-  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway from the system. Besides damage to the system, mois-
Safety Guidelines so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not ture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic
require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are device.
WARNING! driving. NOTE:
 When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touch-
Your complete attention is always required while driving
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and screen features while the vehicle is in motion.
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
secure location where you can pull over and park safely
interact with the features and applications when it is
to do so. Care And Maintenance
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
 Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
result in a collision and death or serious personal
so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
injury.
authorized dealer for repair. scratch the surface.
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level  Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
Please read this manual carefully before using the system. screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles. cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
and effective manner.
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
can result in damage to the touchscreen.  The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to device. Do not let young children use the system. sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
do so may result in injury or property damage.  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your and directions Ú page 454.
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
MULTIMEDIA 253
UCONNECT MODES Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
RADIO MODE
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). Radio Controls
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock is different depending on which mode you are in.
positions. The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
5
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
Remote Sound System Controls 1 — Preset Radio Stations
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the 2 — All Preset Radio Stations
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track, 3 — Seek Down
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker seconds after the current track begins to play. Double 5 — Tune
switch will decrease the volume. pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous 6 — Station Info
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
254 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes: Tune/Scroll Control NOTE:
 AM Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
 FM increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a bands at a slower rate.
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped) selection.
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the Info — If Equipped
Seek
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, Press the Info button to display information related to the
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing currently playing song and radio station.
button in Radio Mode. the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left Direct Tune
Volume & On/Off Control steering wheel audio control button up or down. Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
the Uconnect system. Seek Up and Seek Down channel.
The electronic volume control turns continuously Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. button to tune the radio to the next available station or begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it. reaches the starting station after passing through the (stations that cannot be reached) will become
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station deactivated/grayed out.
at the same volume level as last played. where it began.
Mute Button Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down

Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system. Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
MULTIMEDIA 255
Undo SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
You can backspace an entry by pressing If Equipped you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
Back button on the touchscreen. subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew
GO and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US)
automatically tune to that station. or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
service is available throughout their satellite service area
required.)
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and 5
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
the beep to say a command. See an example: NOTE: Radio Inc.
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what others. If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
VR button and say “Help”. The system provides you broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
with a list of commands. radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. in underground parking garages or tunnels.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
256 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription When in Satellite Mode:

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a  The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is screen.
able to receive the Preview channel only.
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription center.
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription,  The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
US residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin the Channel Number.
or call: 1-800-643-2112
 The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or the Program Information.
call: 1-888-539-7474.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
NOTE: Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and 1 — Browse
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM® 2 — Radio Bands
SXM button on the touchscreen. Mode. 3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
MULTIMEDIA 257
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause

the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
Play/Pause
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content 5
at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
Forward
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the

Live
playing of live content.
258 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES All Remove Favorites

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds the All button, the following categories become available: Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
in absence of user interaction.  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Favorite to be deleted.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows, Alert Settings
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob. screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®  Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
Channels. to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a Game Zone
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in channel with the content in the selected Genre.
the Radio is 50. Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Favorites Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites On-Air
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen. items in the Favorites list. in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and list tunes the radio to that channel.
BROWSE IN SXM Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along knob as well.
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
MULTIMEDIA 259
Add/Delete — If Equipped Setting Presets Audio Settings

Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league activate the Audio Settings screen.
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert 5
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
the top of the screen.
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
Tune Start
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
Radio Modes.
preset is selected during that current song.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. Press the
All button to view all saved presets. To remove a saved
preset, a new preset must be saved over the old one.
260 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
Balance/Fade speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
Equalizer equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
Surround Sound
movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
AUX Volume Offset audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
Radio Off With Door
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 261
MEDIA M ODE Audio Source Selection BLUETOOTH® MODE

Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select Overview
Operating Media Mode button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
Media sources available. When available, you can select to the Uconnect system.
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options: Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
 Now Playing system.
 Artists On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the MEDIA
 Albums button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
 Genres press the Source button on the touchscreen and select
the Bluetooth® button Ú page 263.
 Songs
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
 Playlists on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
5
 Folders Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Mode is
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode AUX MODE
entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the
1 — Seek Down faceplate. Overview
2 — Browse Types of Media Modes Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
3 — Source using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port.
4 — Pause/Play USB MODE Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on the
5 — Info faceplate, selecting the Source button and then the
Overview AUX button.
6 — More Options
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
7 — Seek Up
USB port. Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
the faceplate and then selecting the USB button. device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert a USB switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
located on the faceplate. device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit will switch to
USB Mode and begin to play. The display will show the
track number and index time in minutes and seconds.
Play will begin at the start of track 1.
262 MULTIMEDIA
Controlling The Auxiliary Device Browse Repeat

Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port. to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on the of the browse window displays a list of ways you can the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
faceplate, selecting the Source button, and then the AUX browse through the contents of the USB device. If continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
button. supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist, the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
NOTE: Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
the browse window shows items and their sub-functions, is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and third time.
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can Shuffle
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
also be used to scroll.
the device. In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the ENTER/ to play the selections on the USB device in random order
Seek Up /Seek Down BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the Browse to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device. desired track on the device. Press the Exit button on the feature off.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current Audio
Media Mode
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen button Ú page 253.
of the current selection. to select the desired audio source: USB.
Info
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the display the current track information. Press the Info or
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down Bluetooth®.
X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
feature.
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the to select the desired audio source: AUX.
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
MULTIMEDIA 263
Tracks Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.  Calling Back the last incoming call number
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen After the beep, say one of the following commands and (“Call Back”).
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below an artist: “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can  “Change source to Bluetooth®” “Show Recent Calls”).
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)  “Change source to AUX”
John Smith Mobile”).
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing  “Change source to USB”
that track. Screen Activated Features
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. displayed on the touchscreen.
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
album, song, and genre information is displayed. easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
5
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. PHONE MODE  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS Overview  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, to connect to them quickly.
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to NOTE:
connected USB and AUX devices. dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
The feature supports the following: Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Voice Activated Features Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile” vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
or “Dial 248-555-1212”). your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming For Uconnect customer support:
SMS messages.  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text call 800-465-2001 (English) or
messages. (French) call 800-387-9983
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
264 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the Voice Command Button  For each feature explanation in this section, only the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your The Voice Command button on your steering compound command form of the voice command is
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you given. You can also break the commands into parts and
for private conversation. are already in a call or want to make another say each part of the command when you are asked for
call. it. For example, you can use the compound command
WARNING! form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access can break the compound command form into two voice
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks features if your vehicle is equipped. Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it Phone Operation best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an from you.
accident involving serious injury or death. OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect NATURAL SPEECH
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth® Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
different electronic devices to connect to each other Command works: Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to mobile”. certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to like to”.
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one guide you to complete the task.
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
be used with the system at a time. You will be prompted for a specific command and then sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
guided through the available options. Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
Phone Button
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
The Phone button on your steering wheel is provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
used to get into the Phone Mode and make do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
prompt.
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, requested but the specific name was not recognized.
view phonebook, etc. When you push the  For certain operations, compound commands can be
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
a command. “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following requires more information from the user, it will ask a
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith question to which the user can respond without pushing
mobile.” the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
MULTIMEDIA 265
HELP COMMAND To complete the pairing process, you will need to NOTE:
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to  If there are no phones currently connected with
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
compatibility information.
beep. would like to pair a mobile phone.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the  This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
push of the VR button or the Phone button. ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
CANCEL COMMAND appear.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
you will be returned to the main menu. 4. Search for available devices on your
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
steering wheel when the system is listening for a  Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. 5
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE NOTE: search for Bluetooth® connections.
PHONE  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to NOTE:
Use this QR code to access your digital complete this procedure. During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
experience.  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
you must pair your compatible mobile phone.
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of 2. Press the Phone button.
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
266 MULTIMEDIA
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a NOTE: 3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. “Connect Phone”.
 Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority. 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
button. NOTE:
 Search for available devices on your Blue- During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your AUDIO DEVICE
on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the “messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
connection request. sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
while the system is connecting. to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.” NOTE:
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
connection request from Uconnect. may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
9. When the pairing process has successfully make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
completed, the system will prompt you to choose your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This settings. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE button.
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING 2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If device name for a different phone or audio device
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and you need to choose a particular phone or audio device than the currently connected device or press the
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the follow these steps: preferred Connected Phone from the list.
Bluetooth® device. 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
MULTIMEDIA 267
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device supported phones.
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
button on the touchscreen.  To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. Ú page 271.
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
 Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless appears on the list.
FAVORITE phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
example, after you start the vehicle.
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
the Settings button located to the right of the device  A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
name for a different phone or audio device than the per contact will be downloaded and updated every time button or the Settings Gear button next to the
currently connected device or press the preferred a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone. selected number to display the option’s pop-up.
“Connected Phone” from the list.  Depending on the maximum number of entries In the pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. downloaded, there may be a short delay before the NOTE:
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an 5
available, the previously downloaded phonebook is existing favorite.
you will see the chosen device move to the top of available for use.
the list.
 Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. phone is accessible. 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC  This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or Phone main screen.
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next favorites. This will bring up the options for that
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the phone connection. Favorite contact.
ability to download contact names and number entries
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
268 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY

The following features can be accessed through the 1. Press the Phone button.
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
calling, this feature can be accessed through the 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect: RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
 Redial You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
 Dial by pressing in the number
 All Calls
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back) Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display  Incoming Calls or Calls Received
 Favorites 1 — Answer  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
 Mobile Phonebook 2 — Mute/Unmute  Missed Calls
3 — Ignore These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
 Recent Call Log
4 — Transfer button on the phone main screen.
 SMS Message Viewer
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
CALL CONTROLS Other phone call features include: and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call  End Call
features:  Hold/Unhold/Resume ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
 Swap two active calls NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 269
DO NOT DISTURB PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on on the Phone main screen.
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active. CALL IS IN PROGRESS
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
and send it to voicemail. keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
Automatic reply messages can be: SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
 Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display ters.
5
1 — Answer Button NOTE:
2 — Caller ID Box Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS interrupted by incoming calls.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another NOTE:
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile  Reply with text message is not compatible with
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, iPhone® devices.
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the  Auto reply with text message is only available on Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
the incoming call. Profile (MAP). press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
NOTE: Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
active and held phone call.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
270 MULTIMEDIA
JOIN CALLS Advanced Phone Connectivity WARNING!

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call. PHONE You have full responsibility and assume all risks related
to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
CALL TERMINATION transferred from your mobile phone without terminating Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected serious injury or death.
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active Even though the system is designed for many languages
call.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect and accents, the system may not always work for some.
Phone NOTE:
REDIAL It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
VOICE COMMAND Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” For the best performance: Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the
 Always wait for the beep before speaking entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
dialed from your mobile phone. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away Even though international dialing for most number
from you combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
CALL CONTINUATION combinations may not be supported.
 Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period Audio Performance
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Audio quality is maximized under:
switched to OFF.  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
NOTE:  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
 Low Road Noise
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
 Smooth Road Surface  Low Road Noise
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer  Fully Closed Windows  Smooth Road Surface
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.  Fully Closed Windows
 Dry Weather Conditions
 Dry Weather Conditions
 Operation From The Driver's Seat
MULTIMEDIA 271
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to Voice Text Reply — If Equipped NOTE:
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Uconnect Phone. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
the VR button or Phone button and say:
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
the in-vehicle audio volume. 1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming text implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
Phone Voice Commands paired to Uconnect system.) UconnectPhone.com.
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading incoming
read. text messages only. For further information on how to
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re- enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
pairing instructions. peat one of the predefined messages and follow the iPhone® “User Manual”.
system prompts. Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
command. Here are some examples: PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
 “Call John Smith”
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
5
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later. Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
 “Dial 123 456 7890” Start without When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
No. I’ll be late.
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) me. vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
phone number) 10, 15, 20, 25, more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
Are you there 30, 45, 60> you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push Call me.
yet? minutes late. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
the Phone button and say “Call”, then pronounce the your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a I need See you in 5 <or useful tasks.
I’ll call you later.
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say directions. 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60> To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
“Call John Smith work”. I’m on my way. Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
Can’t talk right minutes.
now. you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
I’m lost. Thanks. and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
272 MULTIMEDIA
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?

Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect SERVICES SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and
ON Mode. Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full landline communications networks. Depending on the
potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™
POWER-UP need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. connected services require an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you
WARNING! SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
Ú page 454. Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use NOTE:
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — and interact with the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
IF EQUIPPED can result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? reach the response center or reach emergency
NOTE: support.
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS button
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission  Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
and use of data from your vehicle Ú page 288. everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending
enclosed areas.
on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle, SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the  Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
many connected vehicle features. SiriusXM Guardian™/Care Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery
 US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/ are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather,
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827 damage to the electrical system or other important
Ú page 349.
parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
bances, actions of third parties or the government,
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
MULTIMEDIA 273
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all Activation — If Equipped Features And Packages
models.
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™ continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™
 The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start connected services. Customer Care agent.
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED
 If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of V EHICLE SERVICES
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily apps.
search, map and send your locations directly to your Download The Vehicle Branded App
Uconnect Navigation. 3. For customers in the United States, select “Customer
Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
 The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle,
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
the Vehicle Branded App.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use activate services in your vehicle.
5
Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ connected Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
services. Included Trial Period For New Vehicles steps away from using connected services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror Your new vehicle may come with an included trial* period  Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
Or Overhead Console for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services device.
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started  Use your Owner Account login and password to open
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is the app and then set up a PIN.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button required.
connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer * Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Care for assistance in an emergency.
274 MULTIMEDIA
 Once on the Remote screen and you have set up For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your “Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in using
horn and lights remotely, if equipped. your email address and password.
 Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of  Edit/Edit Profile:
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™
a location to your Mobile Navigation, if equipped. account, such as your contact information, password
 Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit
the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Profile button to access the details of your account.
Call Centers.  Connected Services Status:
 For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is not Using Your Owner’s Site This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
registered at the dealership, you will have to call the Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/ Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Customer Care call center from inside your vehicle or en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian  Remote Commands:
press the in-vehicle registration button. From there, Residents) provides you with all the information you need, For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
you will be able to register your vehicle and add your all in one place. You can track your service history, find subscription, press one of these icons and enter your
vehicle’s VIN to your account. recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely
 For customers in Canada, register your account via about your vehicle's features, and easily access your start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn
your vehicle. manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM and flash the lights.
Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar. Editing Your Notifications
the key elements of the website that will help you get the
b. Press the Activate Services button from the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM
apps list. Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can
email will be sent to the provided email address. Register button and enter your email address and
elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or
password.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirmation E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
email. It may take a short time before remote notifications, please follow these instructions.
services will be available, but you will be able to
log into the Vehicle Branded App and the
Owner’s Site.
MULTIMEDIA 275
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https:// SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features How It Works
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca (Canadian assistance features located on the rearview mirror or green indicating a call has been placed.
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then overhead console designed to enhance your driving
“Dashboard”. NOTE:
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
Description there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a placed. The system will verbally alert you that a
can edit Notification Preferences. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle connection, push the SOS Call button on the rear-
to notify you, and you can customize the types of and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically view mirror or overhead console or press the
messages. transmit location information. In the event of a minor Cancel button on the touchscreen within
collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS 10 seconds.
USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ button to be connected to a call center agent who can  During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired phone
send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
SOS Call — If Equipped is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will 5
NOTE: go through your mobile device versus the
WARNING! Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are hands-free system which is not available due to
dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular the SOS Call.
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, network availability that is compatible with the device in 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
NOT work without a network connection compatible of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all the agent will stay on the line with you.
with your device. times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your
Center Light Status Description enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
Off No call activated connected services, you consent to being recorded.
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
276 MULTIMEDIA
SOS Call System Limitations  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed. WARNING!
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services.  Network congestion.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency  Weather conditions. (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
purchased outside the United States and Canada are  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason placing an emergency call.
services. (including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
 Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
following may occur at the time the malfunction is Requirements vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
detected:  This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the
 The light will continuously be illuminated red. US or Canada. SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
 The screen will display the following message “Vehicle  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.” Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle must be regis- modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
 An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle phone tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
requires service. Please contact your dealer.” subscription that includes the applicable feature. (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS Call (data) network connection compatible with your device. SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES
system operation. These include, but are not limited to,  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces- WILL OPERATE.
the following factors: sory) position with a properly functioning electrical  The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the
 The ignition key is in OFF position. system. Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- the air bag system may not be working properly and
nected during a vehicle crash. the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center.
damaged during a vehicle crash. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA 277
WARNING!
After a crash where the airbags deploy: Remote Commands
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent. On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
 Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the location
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the from your mobile device. These features include locking/
of the emergency.
Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an autho- unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and
rized dealer service the SOS Call system immedi- 3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
lights of the vehicle.
ately. emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will Press this button to lock
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger Lock
remain on the call until emergency services arrive. your vehicle.
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road condi-
tions or location), do not wait for voice contact from NOTE: Press this button to start
Vehicle Start
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. your vehicle.
 Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case of
All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately Press this button to sound
an emergency.
and move to a safe location. Horn & Lights the horn and activate
 On your behalf, agents are able to notify family your lights.
 Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and members about the collision. 5
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in Press this button to unlock
vehicle damage, accident or injury.  Agents can brief first responders of the situation before Unlock
your vehicle.
they arrive on scene.
Press this button to cancel
 In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak, Cancel Vehicle Start
Automatic SOS — If Equipped emergency services will be dispatched based on the
remote start.
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can last known GPS coordinates.
immediately connect you with help in the event that your  SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen- Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live agent will dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular vehicle in one of three ways:
contact you through the Uconnect system and alert connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite  Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
emergency services. reception, which can limit the ability to reach the Branded App
NOTE: response center or reach emergency support.
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not available
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required for  Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM on all functions)
this feature to function. Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
services for complete service limitation.
(not available on all functions)
278 MULTIMEDIA
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device 5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know Requirements
And The Vehicle Branded App if the command was received by your vehicle.  Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for Guardian™.
mobile device. example, in case of an accidental lock-out):  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM 1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you 4G (data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit are unable to lock your vehicle through the Vehicle Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
code established when you activated your SiriusXM Branded App or your key fob. must be compatible and be connected to an operable
Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
go through to your vehicle. cable feature.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
4. A message will let you know if the command was PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote  An ignition cycle is required for some remote
received by your vehicle. command. commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote
Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site NOTE:
activation.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door
Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
password you used when activating your SiriusXM
appropriately. processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle.
on or during an emergency call.
NOTE: Remote Door Lock/Unlock NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are Description All other remote services should be performed via your
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on your
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without compatible device.
Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to send the the keys and from virtually any distance.
command to by clicking on its image along the top. Remote Vehicle Start
Working Vehicle Conditions
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands. Description
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit reception. and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset
code established when you activated your SiriusXM  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down
Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your connection. the interior.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
MULTIMEDIA 279
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that NOTE: Assist — If Equipped
has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the Description
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the
key, the engine will shut off automatically. Uconnect Care Team for assistance. Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST button
This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped Remote Horn & Lights in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
Description services have been activated, the ASSIST button can
You can set up push notifications every time a command connect you directly to the Customer Care call center (if
is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start. It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
equipped). You will be directed to one of the following four
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also
Working Vehicle Conditions services:
help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any
 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode. reason.  Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need a
tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a
anytime.
last 14 days. command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
 Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Working Vehicle Conditions
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your 5
 The vehicle’s security system has been armed and not  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. services, renew after your trial has expired, for
triggered since the last vehicle start.  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed. reception. connected services, or help answering any general
questions surrounding your connected services.
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.  Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
 The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel,
non-connected Uconnect system features, such as
along with oil and battery power. NOTE:
radio and Bluetooth® connections.
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off. The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud
and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings  Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
 If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic trans- when using this feature. You are responsible for SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
mission. compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the If Equipped
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
reception.
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi overhead console designed to enhance your driving
connection. experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must
be started at least once after alarming the system.
280 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, Requirements
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
be presented with your ASSIST options on the such call recordings. (data) network connection compatible with your device.
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the Send & Go — If Equipped  Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
touchscreen. the applicable feature.
Description
Requirements
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a Vehicle Finder
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the destination on your mobile device, and then send the
US and Canada. Description
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the location
How It Works of your vehicle.
Guardian™ connected services.
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
4G (data) network connection. finding your vehicle even easier.
browse through one of the categories provided, or
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ type the name or keyword in the search box. You can How It Works
and have an active subscription that includes the appli- also select categories such as “Favorites” or Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
cable feature. “Contact List”. Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom of
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC 2. Select your destination from the list that appears. the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec- Location information will then be displayed on the Requirements
trical system. map.
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
Disclaimers From this screen, you will be able to: system.
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you  View the location on a map.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside  See the distance from your current location. 4G (data) network connection compatible with
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to your device.
 Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you,  Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
we may record and monitor your conversations with 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
the applicable feature.
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such pressing the Call button.  Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM 14 days.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle, or via a notification or in the Navigation system.
landline or mobile device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in
accordance with regulatory requirements.
MULTIMEDIA 281
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change
How It Works its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot
Description App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the also view the connected devices from the app screen by
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network vehicle passengers with an internet access pressing the View Connected Devices button.
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow NOTE:
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order
your devices.
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more infor-
 Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary mation on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit https://
connected to the web. 3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The myvehicle.att.com.
 Connect several devices at one time. trial can be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership. WARNING!
 Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over your Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
private in-vehicle network. the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot: wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of
5
 A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your 1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
private network access the Web — great for working Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
and relaxing. and follow the instructions. the features and applications in this vehicle when it is
safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the accident involving in serious injury or death.
WARNING! AT&T portal to get set up.
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot 3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care
accident involving serious injury or death. agent who will assist you.
282 MULTIMEDIA
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped Requirements This data collection and transmission begins when you
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you
Description cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you
system.
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or deactivate your connected services.
work with law enforcement to help recover it. 4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device. Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
How It Works information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law and have an active subscription that includes the
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
applicable feature.
with you to file a stolen vehicle report. For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private
NOTE: policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
your vehicle has been stolen. NOTE:
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will areas. Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by with connected services. If you have concerns about the
your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded Monthly Vehicle Health Report — operation, function or performance of your vehicle, please
the Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings If Equipped take it to an authorized dealer. This report does not
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check the
Description instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in your
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to make
the call. Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health information.
through which a summary of the performance of your
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. Description
law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen
This is provided as a convenience to you and does not Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
vehicle report.
substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle. problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For further
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the information, go to your Owner’s website.
your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You
Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit NOTE:
will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is
vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you
your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s activate services. During this process you will be asked to
should also contact your insurance company to
location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
inform it of the situation.
and other data.
MULTIMEDIA 283
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa: Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle Description
name> with your Voice Code.”
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you
services are needed, or to alert you of other important  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name> peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road.
information, such as recall notices. When you receive a with your Voice Code.” You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and
notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use
the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.” the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
Guardian™ Customer Care agent.  Boundary Alert
 “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my
NOTE: <vehicle name>.” Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM you set.
mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen
Guardian™ Ú page 273.  Curfew Alert
messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon Receive a notification when your car is being driven 5
Alexa: outside of the curfew time.
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command 1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile  Speed Alert
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa! device (Apple® or Android™). Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS. speed limit you set.
remotely access key services and features.  Valet Alert
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven
can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa. 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help, 5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, ask Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
<brand name> for help with my car.” 6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will
be the same user name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. There will be additional settings to confirm
on the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
284 MULTIMEDIA
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
Description ACCOUNT IF E QUIPPED
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
started, follow these steps: ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™ button on the mirror or overhead console? You have
Customer Care. 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
Store® or Google Play. NOTE:
SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the the in-vehicle touchscreen.
your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove
username and password you created when you first your personal data. 2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS
set up your account. Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS information, such as make and model, is transmitted
along with the last known GPS location.
For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™, 3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
active subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
SmartWatch.
equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on else needs emergency assistance.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
enjoy these features: Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR
Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is
 Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock
button in the app and entering your security PIN. available. If you do not have an active subscription, push LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S
the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the 1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
 Remote start or stop your vehicle. touchscreen to activate services. Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
 View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle three minutes or more for the request to get to your
location, tire pressure warning, and more. vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
Branded App comes in handy for these and other
situations.
MULTIMEDIA 285
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE 3. Can I select a different route than the most recent
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
security measures have been engineered into the ASSISTANCE FAQ S vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username, offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
call? The phone number is:
required for the activation of Remote services destinations.
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to  US: 1-800-521-2779
protect your passwords and PINs.  Canada: 1-800-363-4869
CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it FAQ S
App? The Vehicle Branded App is compatible with cover towing or other expenses incurred by using
most devices with the Apple® and Android™ 1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other access to your account. It is your responsibility to
operating systems may be supported in the future. CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more
5. Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED information.
5
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands to 1. How long does it take to send the route and 2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/ destination to my vehicle? Depending on various lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the three minutes or more for the request to get through
either your device or your vehicle is in an area with request to get through to your vehicle. to your vehicle.
below average coverage, it may take longer to log in 2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
and send commands. you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
pop-up message stating that you have a new route use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that pushing the red Panic button.
will cancel the route if selected.
286 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE 6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
ASSISTANCE FAQ S — I F EQUIPPED S TART FAQ S work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your 1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle, Depending on various conditions, it can take three
operating systems may be supported in the future.
a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to minutes or more for the request to get through to
activate this service. You must involve local law your vehicle. CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more
& L IGHTS FAQ S
other law enforcement or government agencies, quickly. However its range is limited. For example, 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service can use the Vehicle Branded App to remote start your three minutes or more for the request to get through
for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle to your vehicle.
purchased through them. comfortable by the time you get to it.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will is why security measures have been engineered into
work together with law enforcement to try to locate 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help
contacted by law enforcement. use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they
pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates? happen to find your device.
Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on 4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App? minutes.
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
the engine to warm up or cool down the interior
connected services subscription to find out if the work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
before you arrive.
insurance provider can offer you a lower rate. operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
NOTE: cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the operating systems may be supported in the future.
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start
SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are button will not stop the vehicle.
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your
vehicle and yourself.
MULTIMEDIA 287
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT 3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN? 8. Can I access every App and service while driving? No,
Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during some applications and services are not available
FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™ while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to
Security PIN will be required to authenticate you use some of the touchscreen features while the
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
when accessing your account via SiriusXM vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
account? There are three ways that you can register
Guardian™ Call or performing any remote services, 9. What happens when my subscription comes up for
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & renewal? If you have added a credit card to your
 Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to an Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. account information, your subscription will be
agent who can assist in registering your new
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN? automatically renewed for a term length in
account.
If you’ve already activated services and forgot your accordance with the service plan that you have
 Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the selected at the then current subscription rate and on
Select the button to speak with an agent, who can PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site. every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your
assist in registering your new account. subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment
 Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu. account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment you have not added a credit card to your account,
Enter your email on the touchscreen and then Account address can be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter 5
follow the prompts from the provided email. You SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in in advance of your expiration date to remind you that
will receive an email with an activation link that your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s your subscription is ending soon.
will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the acti- Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM Guardian™ 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi-
vation link, you will be prompted to fill out your Payment Account. cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
information and accept Terms and Conditions. Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile?
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
Your name, home address, phone number, email
Guardian™ home page to complete your profile customer web portal.
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be
and demo the remote services.
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM personal information. Make your edits and click Save. button on your rearview mirror or overhead console.
Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them? 12. How do I update my credit card information? Login to
subscribe to receive additional services and create a
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote
included trial period for certain Apps and services. SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
command requests.
288 MULTIMEDIA
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my 17. What if I forgot to remove my account information Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription,
subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
Care. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a sub- 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
scription to view its expiration date. When your sub- (data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM
scription is about to expire, you will receive an email with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
or letter of notification. Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are use and disclosure of this information in accordance with
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the (data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
date of cancellation for annual plans or longer. smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Call may be functioning if you have an operable contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing network. Policy.
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If
you have an annual subscription, your subscription The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle’s
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
monthly subscription, your subscription will be health and performance, your vehicle’s location, your
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
canceled on the last day of the month in which you utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
choose to cancel. The collection, use and sharing of this information is
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before performance does not satisfactorily improve from
services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy
your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll want to repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/
remove your account information. This process the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
removes all personal information, returns the operation when not using the Uconnect system.
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
and account information. To remove your account
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle
information from the Uconnect system, contact
health and diagnostic information including location data
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
MULTIMEDIA 289
REGULATORY AND SAFETY The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
I NFORMATION emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
US/CANADA
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation some situations or environments, such as aboard
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a wireless radio Ú page 454.
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body. OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages which
found in radio frequency safety standards and
display vehicle information related to the drivetrain,
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
scientific community. 5
To access Off-road Pages, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen, select the Offroad tab, and then select the
OFF ROAD button on the main screen. Off-Road Pages can
also be accessed through the app drawer.
OFF ROAD Button

290 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR 1 — Transfer Case Status

2 — Latitude/Longitude
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the selectable 3 — Altitude
page options. It provides information for the following 4 — Hill Descent Control Status And Target Speed
items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Target Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 291
VEHICLE DYNAMICS 1 — Steering Angle

2 — Transfer Case Status
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and steering angle. 3 — Rear Axle
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

292 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY G AUGE 1 — Coolant Temperature

2 — Oil Temperature
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil 3 — Oil Pressure
Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery 4 — Battery Voltage
Voltage. 5 — Transmission Temperature
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 293
PITCH & ROLL NOTE:

Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu

294 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION FORWARD F ACING C AMERA

The Suspension page displays the current status of the Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward Facing
vehicle’s suspension system and the current ride height of Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
the vehicle. The Suspension page will also indicate when front view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on
the vehicle’s height changes. the touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera button on
the touchscreen.
Suspension Menu
295
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may WARNING!
result in degraded ABS performance.
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake WARNING! manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
performance under most braking conditions. The system  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- safety of others.
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio transmit- Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of Light
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight such equipment should be performed by qualified The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. professionals. is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
The ABS is activated during braking when the system  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their as four seconds.
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
6
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or system is not functioning and that service is required.
likelihood of ABS activation(s). stop. However, the conventional brake system will continue to
You also may experience the following normal operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
characteristics when the ABS activates: from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
to hear for a short time after the stop) by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
traction afforded. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
 Brake pedal pulsations the light repaired as soon as possible.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
296 SAFETY
REAR SEAT R EMINDER ALERT (RSRA) ELECTRONIC B RAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!
RSRA alerts you of the possible presence of an object, SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
auditory notification. The system will activate can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
automatically if a rear door was opened within 10 minutes conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
of the ignition being placed in the ON/RUN position. RSRA those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets in the on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
rear seats. When the previous conditions are met, RSRA capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
stability and control in various driving conditions.
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to others.
exit the vehicle. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
To enable or disable RSRA, see Ú page 226.
Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light
WARNING! The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
 Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete as long as four seconds.
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
PARK and apply the parking brake. the rate and amount of brake application and then applies If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
 Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock functioning properly and that immediate service is
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
and vehicle is locked. results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with of the system, you must apply continuous braking have the light repaired as soon as possible.
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the released, the BAS is deactivated. between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- prevent the rear axle from entering Anti-Lock Brake
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause System (ABS) before the front axle.
SAFETY 297
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING!

ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle under various driving conditions. Electronic  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) determines Stability Control (ESC) corrects for oversteering or natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these conditions. road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle including those resulting from excessive speed in
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift maintain the desired path. turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it appropriate for the steering wheel position.
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
other vehicles. appropriate for the steering wheel position. ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
NOTE: ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
others.
(if equipped). For a complete explanation of the available path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
ESC modes, see Ú page 297.
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer your vehicle, may change the handling characteris- 6
or understeer condition. tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
WARNING!
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which and driving to the prevailing road conditions. increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of rollover, personal injury and death.
others.
298 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes WARNING! WARNING!

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
ESC On the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
This mode should be used for most driving conditions. TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific offered by the ESC system is reduced. off-highway or off-road use only.
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
Partial Off system is in the “Partial Off” mode. the natural laws of physics from acting on the
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
Full Off — If Equipped
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally accidents, including those resulting from excessive
allowed. This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC And ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE: OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button. in the instrument cluster will come on when the
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
attempts may be required to return to "ESC On" mode. NOTE: should go out with the engine running. If the
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off” ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”. after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
equipped). 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
SAFETY 299
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in HDC Has Three States:  3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).  4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation  5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the with brake or throttle application).
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road vehicle speed).  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
conditions.  9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
Enabling HDC
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the NOTE:
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
mode. speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
 The driveline is in 4WD Low. transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
NOTE:  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the  The parking brake is released.
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each Driver Override
 The driver door is closed.
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Activating HDC
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or 6
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, brake application at any time.
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off Deactivating HDC
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
previously.
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the following conditions occur:
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop HDC set speeds:  Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
HDC Target Set Speeds application.
that caused the ESC activation.
 P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-  Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped vate. below 40 mph (64 km/h).
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in  R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
 Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
speed by actively controlling the brakes.  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
300 SAFETY
Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch light will flash when HDC  HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will The system will not activate if the transmission is in
following conditions occur: stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
cooled sufficiently. manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
 The driver pushes the HDC switch. remain active.
 The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. WARNING!
 The parking brake is applied. WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
 The driver door opens. vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
for greater than 70 seconds.
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
 The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
(HDC exits immediately). Hill Start Assist (HSA) attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
 HDC detects excessive brake temperature. HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop objects, and most importantly brake operation to
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
Feedback To The Driver conditions. Your complete attention is always required
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the throttle before this time expires, the system will release Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
driver about the state HDC is in. brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as or serious personal injury.
 The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and normal.
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to Disabling And Enabling HSA
activate:
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
 The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several  The feature must be enabled. current setting, proceed as follows:
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
 The vehicle must be stopped.  If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
 The parking brake must be off. see Ú page 104.
 The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to  The driver door must be closed.  If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
excess speed.  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. Ú page 226.
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
SAFETY 301
Towing With HSA Traction Control System (TCS) WARNING!

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
towing a trailer. driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the Traction If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
Control System (TCS) may apply brake pressure to the stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
WARNING! spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide load to eliminate trailer sway.
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to
be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
I F E QUIPPED
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the taillights,
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing Control (ESC) are in reduced modes. to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
the brake pedal.
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
 HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
to place the transmission in PARK. excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate 6
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury. NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) weight recommendations Ú page 204.
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
Electronic Brake Control system will prepare the brake disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
system for a panic stop. “Full Off” modes. Rear Detection Zones
302 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such as ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
let the driver know that the system is operational. The a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is Rear Corners” message will display in the cluster, both located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
in PARK. mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane not occur. This is normal operation. The system will Ú page 304.
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone automatically recover and resume function when the
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends condition clears.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
 The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on Warning Light Location
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lights when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of Radar Sensor Locations The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
If the system detects degraded performance due to
couple of seconds). if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you
during these types of zone entries.
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors are of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in the side
located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain
contamination so that the BSM system can function illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met.
properly. Do not block the taillights with foreign objects First clear the taillights around the sensors of the
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). blockage. After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition
from ON to OFF and then back ON.
SAFETY 303
Entering From The Side Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
side of the vehicle. less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between normal operation and your vehicle does not require
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the service.
warning light will not illuminate. The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes Ú page 454.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear 6
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative Overtaking/Approaching
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Overtaking/Passing
Rear Monitoring
304 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE: Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
not be able to alert the driver. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
WARNING! chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid detected object are present on the same side at the same
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
must be careful when backing up, even when using muted.
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look NOTE:
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots system, the radio is also muted.
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
injury or death.
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
Blind Spot Modes is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system. Blind Spot Alert Off
RCP Detection Zones
For further information, see Ú page 226. When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph NOTE:
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Only mode, the The BSM system will store the current operating mode
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
side view mirror based on a detected object. However, started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) used.
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, mode, the system will respond with both visual and
including reducing the radio volume. audible alerts when a detected object is present.
Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is
muted.
SAFETY 305
Blind Spot Assist Cameras  Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is selected, the
There are cameras located in the exterior mirrors to assist system will default to the maximum blind spot zone
in blind spot detection. Refer to Ú page 189 to learn more regardless of what size trailer is attached .
about how the cameras function with turn signal NOTE:
engagement or refer to Ú page 191 to learn how to Selected setting is stored when the ignition is placed in the
activate the cameras through the Camera's screen. OFF position. To change this setting, it must be selected
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
Trailer Merge Assist
Trailer Length Detection
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross Path is Once the trailer presence has been established, the trailer
disabled. length will be established (by making a 90 degree turn)
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist and then the trailer length category (e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to
NOTE: 6 m)) will be displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds
When a trailer with an electric brake is connected to the 1 — Vehicle after completing the turn.
vehicle, the instrument cluster display will provide a menu 2 — Trailer
to allow a selection of the trailer type. There will be two NOTE:
options provided: Conventional and Goose/Fifth Wheel. During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a stand-
Goose/Fifth Wheel Trailer is incompatible and when Automatic Trailer Detection still for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new “trailer detection
selected, the BSM system will disable until the trailer is request” is enabled by the system once the vehicle 6
There are two modes of operation for the detection of the
disconnected. If the wrong option is selected, the system resumes motion.
trailer length:
can be reset by either disconnecting and reconnecting the Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge Assist
trailer harness connector or disabling then re-enabling the  Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is selected, the
feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is considered the
Blind Spot Monitoring system in the customer settings in system will use the blind spot sensors to automatically
forward most portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward
the Uconnect system. This will prompt the trailer selection determine the presence and length of a trailer. The
most portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the
menu again to allow for the correct selection. presence of a trailer will be detected using the blind
trailer.
spot radar within 90 seconds of forward movement of
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot the vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above 6 mph Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge Assist
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind spot zone (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once the trailer has feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is measured at the
to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer Merge Assist consists been detected, the system will default to the maximum widest portion of the trailer and may include wheels, tires,
of three sub functions: blind spot zone until the length has been verified. You finders, or rails.
 Automatic Trailer Detection will see “Auto” in the instrument panel cluster .
 Trailer Length Detection
 Trailer Merge Warning
306 SAFETY
NOTE: NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported by Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of actual WARNING!
Trailer Merge Assist. length. Trailers that are the same size as the category The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be subject to being detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
placed in the category above or below the correct one. is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
Trailer Merge Warning animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the
injury or death.
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination of
the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror on the
side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition, an
audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)
reduced Ú page 304. WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED
Trailer Length Detection NOTE: FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
 The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert the warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
1 — Trailer Length display), and may apply a haptic warning in the form of a
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
2 — Trailer Hitch brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a potential
outside the detection zones.
3 — Trailer Width frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the
 The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lights when potential collision.
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one of the a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of
following categories: the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a NOTE:
couple of seconds). FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
 Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind Spot zone will be
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .  Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighborhoods,
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
 Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to 6 m) — etc. may lead to an increased amount of false alerts.
system determines that a forward collision is probable,
Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft (6 m) . This is normal operation.
the driver will be provided with audible and visual
 Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to 9 m) — warnings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft (9 m) . form of a brake jerk.
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft
(9 m to 12 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted
to Max distance .
SAFETY 307
If the driver does not take action based upon these When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a front of you is no longer probable, the warning message WARNING!
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and will be deactivated Ú page 454. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
NOTE:
to the warnings by braking and the system determines type of potential collision. The driver has the
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but  The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will (5 km/h). vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
compensate and provide additional brake force as  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than warning could lead to serious injury or death.
required. When towing a trailer, the system will also vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
respond to activate the trailer brakes (if equipped). course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below normal FCW activation and functionality. Turning FCW On Or Off
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events control settings. For further information, see Ú page 226.
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will  To turn the FCW system on, press the Forward Collision
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold be deactivated until the next key cycle. button once.
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the  To turn the FCW system off, press the Forward Collision
the brakes.
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
button once. 6
surroundings. NOTE:
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, front.
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or  When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
higher rate of speed. warning the driver of a possible collision with the
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will
screens. be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
 During an FCW event when towing a trailer, your
Electronic Brake system will respond by activating the
FCW Message trailer brakes (if equipped).
308 SAFETY
 When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the system FCW Limited Warning
prevents the system from providing limited Active provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to
Braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings, Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
collision. which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this NOTE: drivable under normal conditions, Active Braking may not
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli- The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn- possible collision warnings experienced. system performance is no longer present, the system will
ings and it applies autonomous braking. return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
NOTE:
 The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from see an authorized dealer.
 Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
the system from providing limited active braking, or Service FCW Warning
it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is restarted.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, displays:
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
programmable through the Uconnect system  Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Ú page 226.
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the event of a potential frontal collision. the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
 The system will retain the last setting selected by the the system checked by an authorized dealer.
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it driver after ignition shut down. Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
applies autonomous braking.  FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over- If Equipped
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or (FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
higher rates of speed. warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
NOTE:  FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW screens. cyclist.
possible collision warnings experienced.
SAFETY 309
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system, The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
the system may provide maximum braking to mitigate the so no warning or active braking will be available in case of maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian/cyclist. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold NOTE: driven — this is normal and there should be no adjustment
the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then for this increased pressure.
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by the
release the brakes. When the system determines a See Ú page 416 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
driver after ignition shut down. The system will not reset to
collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted. tires.
longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h). TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
(TPMS) any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
WARNING! pressure loss through the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
recommended cold placard pressure.
type of potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. The off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by NOTE: cold placard pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or
death. one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the 6
TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
Turning PEB On Or Off values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
NOTE: display a TPMS message. When this occurs you must above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold this information.
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes- placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
trian/cyclist. turn off. NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
Control settings Ú page 226. (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will TPMS Warning Light off.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
Emergency Braking button.
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
Braking button. three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period.
310 SAFETY
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold NOTE: The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
or condition.
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will module.
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi  If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill Alert
feature the TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure NOTE:
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. It is particularly important for you to check the tire
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the maintain the proper pressure.
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and The TPMS consists of the following components:
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.  Receiver module
cold placard pressure value.
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-  Four TPMS sensors
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain  Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
CAUTION! correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure ment cluster
 The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip- gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.  TPMS Warning Light
have been established for the tire size equipped on  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres- Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres- Pressure Warnings
sure in the tire.
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire four active road tires. In addition, the
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor func- also be displayed.
tion checked.
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
SAFETY 311
Service TPMS Warning A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light will incorrect TPMS sensor location, the TPMS Warning Light
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds the instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the tire
to indicate which sensor is not being received. pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled,
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, Warning Light will no longer flash and the tire pressure
and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display display, and a pressure value will display in place of the values in the correct locations.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in following: Spare
a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the  Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation  The non-matching full size spare or compact spare tire
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the as the TPMS sensors. not monitor the pressure in the non-matching full size 6
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the  Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains spare or compact spare tire.
instrument cluster will return to its original color, and the materials that may block radio wave signals.  If you install the non-matching full size spare or
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to wheel housings. pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the  Using tire chains on the vehicle. the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
TPMS to receive this information. and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
NOTE:
cluster will still display a pressure value in a different
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
color and an “Inflate to XX” message.
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
312 SAFETY
 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and warns With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash the driver through the instrument cluster, when either a connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing process
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In low tire pressure condition falls below 25% of the drivers by entering the settings menu in the radio and selecting
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE set pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The trailer. Select the desired trailer profile to pair to, open the
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds instrument cluster will display the actual tire pressure or “Tire Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires”
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure dashes for each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer Ú page 226.
value. position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS can
NOTE:
 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will support up to 12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process is
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for four configurable trailers Ú page 226.
complete.
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non-matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
receive this information. Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors must be installed in the desired trailer tires and
(TTPMS) — If Equipped the sensors must be paired to the truck. If the target trailer
requires more than the provided four sensors, additional
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS) is a sensors can be purchased at an authorized Ram
feature that displays the trailer tire pressure values and dealership.
warns the driver of a low tire pressure event based on the
drivers set target tire pressure value, through the TTPMS
settings found in the radio.
SAFETY 313
NOTE: Service TTPMS Warning

If the pairing process times out after three minutes of no If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
communication with a sensor, a double horn chip will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service Required”
occur indicating the pairing has failed and a message will message for a minimum of five seconds.
display on the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
cessful. Under certain circumstances, the double horn Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
chirp may continue to happen every three minutes indi- Pressure System Service Required" message will no
cating the failed pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be driven for
may be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
then back to RUN position. TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Not Configured
Warnings A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” message
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active road will be displayed in the instrument cluster on the TTPMS
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing tires is detected, the instrument cluster will display a instrument cluster graphic when a trailer number is
message stating “Trailer Tire Pressure Low”. The selected that has not had trailer tire pressure sensors
Follow the on screen prompts to select the number of paired. To correct this condition, see Ú page 226.
axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), instrument cluster will then display the TTPMS graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Trailer
and the set trailer tire pressure. The range is selectable
pressure values in a different color. 6
anywhere between 25-125 psi (172-862 kPa). The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible Trailer” message will be displayed in the instrument
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in cluster when the trailer sensors being received by the
Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi (34 kPa) and wait a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the TTPMS module do not match the trailer sensors paired to
for a horn chirp. It may take up to three minutes for the customer programmed target tire pressure value as the current trailer number selected. This message will be
chirp to occur, indicating that the sensor has paired. shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic. displayed when the sensors being received completely
Repeat process on each tire, in order, until complete. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will automatically match the sensors paired to another trailer number
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. update the graphic display in the instrument cluster, configured in the TTPMS module.
If pairing was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will returning to its original color. The vehicle may need to be
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number must
sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
be selected in the radio Ú page 226.
retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup order for the TTPMS to receive the updated information.
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single
pairing process to receive the success screen.
314 SAFETY
System Limitations If the Hazard Warning Flashers do not come on while In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
The TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting through inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, the customer
steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than 30 ft. It is inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal will be able to select a pressure setting for both the front
recommended to use standard tires and trailers less than from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
30 ft long to avoid dropouts or difficulty when pairing. be moved slightly forward or backward. pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure each axle setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure
NOTE: values for the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process is placard pressure label.
complete. Operation:
NOTE:
Tire Fill Alert  The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the ignition is
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended placed in the OFF position. The feature must be
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire pressure.
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire. re-enabled through the radio each time the ignition is
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled placed back in the ON/RUN position Ú page 226.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the The customer may also store the pressure values chosen
continues to inflate the tire.
radio. for each axle in the radio as a preset pressure. The
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let customer will be allowed to store up to two sets of preset
NOTE: out to reach proper inflation level. values in the radio for the front and rear axle pressure
 Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire  The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then values.
Fill Alert system. underinflated and will continue to chirp every five Once the customer selects the tire pressures for the front
 The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire. and rear axles that they want to inflate or deflate to, they
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is NOTE: can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
in deactivation mode (if equipped). After use, the TFA feature will NOT remain active after NOTE:
The system will be activated when the system detects an ignition shut down. The feature will need to be re-enabled The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
increase of tire pressure, while filling the fire. The ignition when the vehicle is restarted Ú page 226. tire at a time.
must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK
The customer may choose to disable or enable the STFA
(P). SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) feature through use of the TFA settings in the radio. If STFA
NOTE: The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional appears grayed out it must be turned on prior to selecting.
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must be
Fill Alert mode. system. The system is designed to allow the customer to enabled through the radio Ú page 226.
The Hazard Warning Flashers will come on to confirm the select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the
customer while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
SAFETY 315
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in
3500 Series Trucks longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
PARK (P). Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPIS. longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in
The Hazard Warning Flashers will come on to confirm the The TPIS uses wireless technology with wheel rim place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure of the following:
If the Hazard Warning Flashers do not come on while levels.  Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
inflating or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies
an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. as the TPMS sensors.
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may NOTE:  Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
need to be moved slightly forward or backward. It is particularly important for you to check the tire materials that may block radio wave signals.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. maintain the proper pressure. wheel housings.
Operation: The TPIS consists of the following components:  Using tire chains on the vehicle.
 The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is  Receiver module  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
reached to let the user know when to stop inflating or  Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
6
deflating the tire. applications) OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overinflated  Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
or over deflated and will continue to chirp every five applications) Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
seconds if the user continues to inflate or deflate the are the restraint systems:
 Pressure display in the instrument cluster
tire.
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications) FEATURES
tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display.
level.  Seat Belt Systems
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the  Child Restraints
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received. Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
316 SAFETY
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
Please pay close attention to the information in this bags room to inflate. of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
possible. bags will inflate forcefully into the space between vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the occupants and the door and occupants could be times.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: injured. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be (BeltAlert)
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
seat. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
Ú page 449 for customer service contact
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat information. BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child driver and outboard front seat passenger
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear WARNING! (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
seating position Ú page 330.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can in the START or ON/RUN position.
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
Initial Indication
move the seat as far back as possible and use the younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
proper child restraint Ú page 330. restraint. If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
them or under their arm. seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
child restraint to make sure that you are using it a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
properly. restraint in that vehicle. on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
shoulder belts properly. SEAT BELT S YSTEMS unoccupied.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
SAFETY 317
BeltAlert Warning Sequence NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or WARNING!
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. killed.
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger Lap/Shoulder Belts  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and Crew Cab that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert front center seating position have combination lap/  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder shoulder belts. using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat the event of a crash.
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
Change Of Status the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
6
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped WARNING!
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
 Two people should never be belted into a single seat
buckled again. your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
belt. People belted together can crash into one
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items  In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer than one person, no matter what their size.
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
and cargo is properly stowed. buckled up properly.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized (Continued)
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
318 SAFETY
WARNING! WARNING!
 A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
as low as possible and keep it snug. be used together.
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt Pulling Out The Latch Plate
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
Program facility for inspection.
nearest you.
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
Wear your seat belt snugly. adjust the seat.
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that belt to go around your lap.
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
SAFETY 319
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a anchor point.
collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of Adjustable Anchorage
the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure 6
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top that it is locked in position.
Positioning The Lap Belt of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward NOTE:
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is and move it up or down to the position that serves you belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The best. without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
320 SAFETY
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the

WARNING! mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your “click.”
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat go around your lap.
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
 Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
the vehicle is stationary.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
Instructions (Regular Cab Only) buckle.
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat
seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied. plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
the seat.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
from its stowed position on the seat. restraint.
SAFETY 321
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating WARNING!

Instructions — If Equipped
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and Crew increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. mended seating positions. Remove and store the
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is
comfortable. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
WARNING!
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
 If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop- shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu- position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
pant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only 6
restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a colli- if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
sion. Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
 When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
WARNING!
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach required in order to properly fit the original seat belt Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
worn, the distance between the front edge of the accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu- they are wearing a seat belt.
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
(Continued) across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
322 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
work for all size occupants, including those in child webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
restraints. occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
NOTE: buckle until you hear a "click."
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
worn snugly and positioned properly. remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
air bag must be replaced immediately. restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Energy Management Feature WARNING!
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
release webbing in a controlled manner. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
(ALR) — If Equipped seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Retractor (ALR) Locations a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor restraint in that vehicle.
Ú page 339.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
SAFETY 323
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS  Supplemental Side Air Bags
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.  Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
(SRS)
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until  Seat Belt Pretensioners
the entire seat belt is extracted. Some of the safety features described in this section may
 Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an Air Bag Warning Light
authorized dealer.
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) of the air bag system whenever the ignition
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking associated with the electrical Air Bag System If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
locking mode. following Air Bag System Components: not inflate.
WARNING!
Air Bag System Components The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  Air Bag Warning Light The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the 6
feature or any other seat belt function is not working  Steering Wheel and Column instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
properly when checked according to the procedures for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
in the Service Manual.  Instrument Panel
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
 Knee Impact Bolsters Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children startup.
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
324 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. detected, which could affect the Supplemental
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
dealer service the air bag system immediately. panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
the ON/RUN position. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
eight-second interval. service the vehicle immediately. Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or For additional information regarding the Redundant Air 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
remains on while driving. Bag Warning Light, see Ú page 115. 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
NOTE: Front Air Bags
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
WARNING!
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver  Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering panel during front air bag deployment could cause
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
WARNING! words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument bag covers.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
restraint.
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. (Continued)
SAFETY 325
3500 Series Truck

WARNING! WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front and front passenger air bags. This system provides output  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child appropriate to the severity and type of collision as severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child which may receive information from the front impact sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
restraint in that vehicle. sensors (if equipped) or other system components. seat belts even though you have air bags.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy Front Air Bag Operation
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
Features output is used for more severe collisions. Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
2500 Series Truck protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat frontal collisions, including some that may produce
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), Advanced Front Air Bags. collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
which may receive information from the front impact
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of 6
sensors (if equipped) or other system components. WARNING!
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an  No objects should be placed over or near the air bag vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy on the instrument panel or steering wheel because deceleration.
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
output is used for more severe collisions. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front inflate. not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether have deployed.
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
the air bags and you could be injured because the air collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
Advanced Front Air Bags.
bags may no longer be functional. The protective position, away from an inflating air bag.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
only when the air bags are inflating.
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
(Continued) units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
seat position.
inflate the front air bags.
326 SAFETY
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
bolsters in any way.
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band speed and with such a high force that it could injure
radios, etc. occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Label Location
Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING! SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
Side Air Bags (SABs). between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs pushed into you, causing serious injury.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
structure. bag.
SAFETY 327
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. WARNING!
certain side impact events. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
WARNING! collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger of the seat.
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
should remain free from any obstructions. blink your eyes. severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
install any accessory items in your vehicle which WARNING!
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket  Occupants, including children, who are up against or Bags.
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for killed. Occupants, including children, should never
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or NOTE:
roof of the vehicle for any reason. area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
6
in an infant or child restraint.
Side Impacts Rollover Events
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side are necessary for your protection in all collisions. Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) They also help keep you in position, away from an activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid belts properly and sit upright with their backs against severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts the size of the child.
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
328 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not If A Deployment Occurs Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately be in place to protect you.
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the after deployment.
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and NOTE: WARNING!
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
both sides of the vehicle. system. protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in or all of the following may occur: immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
certain rollover or side impact events.  The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions Controller System serviced as well.
Air Bag System Components and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
NOTE: NOTE:
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally but they will open during air bag deployment.
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, authorized dealer immediately.
see your doctor immediately.
 Air Bag Warning Light Enhanced Accident Response System
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
 Steering Wheel and Column particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the In the event of an impact, if the communication network
 Instrument Panel process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
 Knee Impact Bolsters
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita- Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
 Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped tions for cleaning.
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
SAFETY 329
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the NOTE: Maintaining Your Air Bag System
following functions: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the WARNING!
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped) check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment  Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as not modify the components or wiring, including
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter- If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
system by following the procedure described below. If you
 Unlock the power door locks have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer. the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Enhanced Accident Response System side steps or running boards.
Response System: Reset Procedure  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door functions after an event, the ignition switch must be your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
 Cut off battery power to the:  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
6
 Engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
 Electric Motor (if equipped) compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
and starting the engine.
 Electric power steering system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
 Brake booster
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
 Electric park brake towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
 Automatic transmission gear selector the Enhanced Accident Response System reset. dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
 Horn
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
 Front wiper authorized dealer.
330 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR) To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is There are different sizes and types of restraints for
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. children from newborn size to the child almost large
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain such as law enforcement, that have the special seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag equipment, can read the information if they have access seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist to the vehicle or the EDR. instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle CHILD R ESTRAINTS restraint.
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
designed to record such data as: times, including babies and children. Every state in the a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
 How various systems in your vehicle were operating; it in the vehicle where you will use it.
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. NOTE:
were buckled/fastened;
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled  For additional information, refer to http://
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler- up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
ator and/or brake pedal; and, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear 1–888–327–4236
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. seats rather than in the front.
 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
These data can help provide a better understanding of the website for additional information: https://
WARNING!
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. tc.canada.ca/en/road-transportation/
NOTE: In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a child-car-seat-safety
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR even an infant on your lap could become so great that
under normal driving conditions and no personal data you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. are. The child and others could be badly injured or
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi- proper restraint for the child’s size.
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
SAFETY 331
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers not reached the height or weight limits of their child
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who have
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It 6
is recommended for children from birth until they reach WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
child seats can be used either rear-facing or air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by restraint.
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
allowed by their convertible child seat. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
332 SAFETY
WARNING!
Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing  Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it children who are over two years old or who have outgrown child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing when installing an infant or child restraint.
child may be more severely injured as a result. convertible child seat. Children should remain in a  After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
child seat. ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
All children whose weight or height is above the the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
vehicle by the seat belt.
personal injury.
SAFETY 333
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
between the neck and arm? child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach? periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
the front of the seat when their back is against the A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
vehicle’s seat belt alone: booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat? WARNING!
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
way back? will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
334 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Combined Weight of the
Restraint Type LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors + Seat Belt + Top Tether
Child + Child Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Restraint
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage LATCH Positions For Installing Child
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
(LATCH) Restraint System Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
Restraints In This Vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
LATCH Label information.
Regular Cab LATCH Positions

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 335
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach 65 lb (29.5 kg) kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
the child restraint? LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65
lb (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used child restraint.
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No
restraint? Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
336 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear seat:
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using N/A – Regular Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Split Bench in the center seating position.
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions? No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied lower
anchorages for the center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
lower LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
Yes
front passenger seat? contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 36.
SAFETY 337
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are Regular Cab models have tether strap
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it anchorages behind the front center and right
meets the seatback. They are just visible when seats. Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have
you lean into the rear seat to install the child tether strap anchorages located behind each
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger of the rear seats.
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
6
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side)
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint In

Raised Position
338 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH WARNING!

Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
WARNING! instructions, see Ú page 338.
 Do not install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH system. This position is not Always follow the directions of the child restraint
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers) position.
Restraint
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped  Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will than one child restraint. For typical installation
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage instructions, see Ú page 338.
belt, following the instructions below. See Ú page 339 to
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear Seat: 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The Center LATCH Anchorages Available tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, anchorages.
attached to the anchorage.
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or for that seating position. If the second row seat can
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
position. head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
SAFETY 339
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected installation, instead of buckling it behind the child
seating position. restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint
Vehicle Seat Belt
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
the top tether anchorage. See Ú page 342 for
not toys and that they should not play with them. lap/shoulder belt.
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child WARNING! WARNING!
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child  Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH  Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child child could be badly injured or killed.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
installing an infant or child restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
in any direction.  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
Regular Cab
(ALR) Seat Belt: used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 6
other items or equipment to the vehicle. equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
by other occupants or being used to secure child
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
child’s reach.
retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 322 for additional information on ALR.
340 SAFETY
Crew Cab And Mega Cab Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are Child Restraints In This Vehicle
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Ú page 322 for additional information on ALR. The Locations
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of
the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Please see the table below and the following sections for ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
more information. Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the the seat belt to install a forward-facing
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended
forward-facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the and the child restraint is allowed, if the
Yes
back of the front passenger seat? child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
SAFETY 341
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
The head restraints can be removed in
every rear seating position if they interfere
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 36.
In positions with cinching latch plates
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes – Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up
the seat belt against the belt path of the
No – ALR to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk
child restraint?
in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. For Mega And Crew Cab Models 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
(ALR): recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if ad- against the child seat.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in justable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt 6
lap/shoulder belt. wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
for the child seat. You may also move the front seat to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
WARNING! forward to allow more room for the child seat. retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
For Regular Cab Models the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
 Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
The child could be badly injured or killed. tion. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possi-
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
ble to keep the child as far from the passenger air bag
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
as possible.
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child lap portion around the child restraint while you push
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt the child restraint rearward and downward into the
path. vehicle seat.
342 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens,
tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor, (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the
see Ú page 342. be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it.
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
room for the child seat. You may also move the front button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the child restraint.
in any direction.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
path. the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped: a “click.”
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap portion around the child restraint while you push Tether Anchorage
lap/shoulder belt. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat. WARNING!
WARNING! 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
 Improper installation or failure to properly secure a seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
child could be badly injured or killed. tether strap. See Ú page 342 for directions to attach
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
a tether anchor. that is approved for that seating position, located
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the location of
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt approved tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) Ú page 334.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY 343
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks: 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
anchorages are located behind the center and strap should go between the head restraint posts seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck, underneath the head restraint. You may need to
the top tether anchorages are located behind adjust the head restraint to the upward position to
each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover over pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint
each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child and between its posts.
restraint: 3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, tether strap according to the child seat
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor manufacturer’s instructions.
directly behind the seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, Head Restraint In Raised Position
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. 6
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a
tether strap loop located behind each seating
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap
of the child restraint.
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint
In Raised Position
344 SAFETY
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the 4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see Center Seat:
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
under the head restraint, through the tether strap child seat manufacturer’s instructions. seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop
behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the
NOTE: tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and under the head restraint, through the tether strap
right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop
child seats should be connected to the center tether strap behind either the right or left outboard seat.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
SAFETY 345
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint 5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
behind the child seat, through the tether strap loop manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard left tether straps before the center tether strap.
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Attached

To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop Route the tether straps following the directions for
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
right and left seating positions, above. WARNING! 6
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. do not tighten the straps yet. increased head motion and possible injury to the
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the tether strap following the directions for the center the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
seating position, above. strap.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
346 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS CONNECTED VEHICLES Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. information and private communications without your
mode. If the light is either not on during
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
WARNING! & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
Ú page 124.
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
serious injury or death. been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
WARNING!
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may immediately Ú page 315.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
injured or killed. related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
Defroster
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. involving serious injury or death. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
using a seat belt properly. SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE inoperable.
I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Floor Mat Safety Information
TRANSPORTING P ETS Seat Belts Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
collision. system. accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have operation of your vehicle in other ways.
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
belts. take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
SAFETY 347
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause side floor area. To check for interference, with the re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, pedals then re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT  It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
install your floor mat upside down or turn to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
trunk.
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm your floor mat has been properly installed and is
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
regular basis. passenger’s side floor area. by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
an additional floor mat on top of an ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE 6
existing floor mat. of vehicle control.
Tires
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
(Continued) Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
vehicle.
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
(Continued)
348 SAFETY
Lights WARNING! CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn  If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ WARNING!
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
panel. closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Follow these precautions to prevent carbon monoxide
Door Latches poisoning:
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
Fluid Leaks controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
blower at high speed. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
immediately. system.
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
EXHAUST GAS system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
WARNING! damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon side windows fully open.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
these safety tips:
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
349
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch Uconnect
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the display, the Hazard Warning Flashers button is located though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
upper switch bank just below the radio. above the display. NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

If equipped, the overhead console may contain an ASSIST
and an SOS button. Depending on the vehicles trim level,
the overhead console may vary.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button Hazard Warning Flashers Button 7

Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your Assist And SOS Buttons
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists. 1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
Hazard Warning Flashers Button

350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: SOS Call

 The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you 1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
are connected to an operable 4G (data) network, which NOTE:
comes as a built in feature. Other services will only be In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ or Ram Connect a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
service is active and you are connected to an operable call to an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
4G (data) network. connection, push the SOS Call button on the overhead
ASSIST Call console or press the cancellation button on the Device
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you to Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
any one of the following support centers: LED light on the overhead console.
Assist And SOS Buttons  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a 2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
tow, just push the ASSIST button to connect to buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
1 — ASSIST Button a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
2 — SOS Button what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
fees may apply for roadside assistance. operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle the following important vehicle information to an SOS
WARNING! support for SiriusXM Guardian™ (if equipped). operator:
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other  Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering vehicle issues.  The vehicle brand.
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
 Ram Connect Customer Care (if equipped) – Total  The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
related to the use of the features and applications in
support for Radio, Phone and NAV issues. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an through the vehicle audio system to determine if
accident involving serious injury or death. additional help is needed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
SOS Call System Limitations

WARNING! WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire capabilities.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
related to the use of the features and applications in gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an following may occur at the time the malfunction is
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
accident involving serious injury or death.
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which  The overhead console light located within the ASSIST
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
NOTE:
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is  The Device Screen will display the following message:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
required for the SOS Call system to function properly. “Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please contact an
rized by the subscriber.
authorized dealer.”
 Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s  The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical  An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle Device
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This Requires Service. Please contact an authorized
operator may be able to open a voice connection
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to dealer.”
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add WARNING!
operator should be able to speak with you or other aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
 Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you
7
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper- IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec- REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
tion. DENT), THE UCONNECT OR RAM CONNECT  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate WILL NOT OPERATE. malfunction in any part of the system is detected.
emergency responders and provide them with If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
Control system immediately.
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors NOTE:

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS WARNING!
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
the subscriber.
to, the following factors: vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 4G (data)
 The ignition is in the OFF position. road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
and GPS antennas. You could prevent 4G (data) and
the jack or changing the wheel.
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are from placing an emergency call. An operable 4G (data)  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
damaged during a crash. network connection and a GPS signal is required for vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
the SOS Call system to function properly. could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
nected during a vehicle crash. Automatic SOS — If Equipped
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can where it can be raised on a lift.
signals are unavailable or obstructed. immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
 Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility. radio supplement for complete information. a jack.
 Operator error by the SOS operator.  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
 4G (data) network congestion. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
 Weather. vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
Use this QR code to access your digital
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. experience.
pery areas.
WARNING!
NOTE:
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system,
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks disabled to assist with changing a tire.
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications This feature can be activated through the Uconnect
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an system Ú page 244.
accident involving serious injury or death.
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING NOTE: Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or vehicle is being raised or lifted. assembly out from under the seat.
slippery areas.
J ACK L OCATION
WARNING!
The jack and tools are stored under the front passenger
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the seat.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or REMOVAL O F JACK A ND T OOLS
changing the wheel.
To access the jack and tools, you must remove the plastic
access cover located on the side of the front passenger’s
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a
3. Apply the parking brake.
locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
4. Shift the transmission into PARK (P). cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
5. Turn the ignition OFF. seat frame.
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally Turn the jack turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the from bracket assembly.
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel. 7
Jack Access Cover
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly

Wheel Blocked Example
CAUTION! WARNING!
 The lug wrench can only be attached to extension After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
two (2). the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
 When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the
sure the large flared end opening on extension four
vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
(4) is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism
serious injury.
adjusting nut.
 Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly. REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE
Jacking Tools 1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
There are two ways to assemble the tools: Assembled For Jack Operation the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away from the
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and the
top of the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Assembled For Jack Operation

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising 1 — Lug Wrench
1 — Lug Wrench 2 — Extension 2
2 — Extension 2 3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4 Winch Mechanism Tube
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4 5 — Jack Driver
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to WARNING!
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole  Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until transmission in PARK.
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle. raised.
Removing The Retainer  Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE:  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack. 7
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch. you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
 If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
of motor traffic.
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
See the following steps for proper jacking and tire

removal:
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a
dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel covers
Jack Warning Label they must be removed before raising the vehicle off the Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
ground Ú page 360.
3. Place the assembled jack and tools into the jacking
position.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the following images
for proper jacking locations.
Lug Wrench Adapter Location

Lug Wrench Adapter
Jack / Extensions Placement

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Front Jacking Location

When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the
extension tubes. Place the jack under the axle as
close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes ex-
tending to the front. Connect the extension tubes and
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
lug wrench. Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driv-
CAUTION!
er to the jack and connect the jack driver to the exten- Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
sion tubes. Place the jack under the axle between the the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
spring and the shock absorber with the extension adjust the jack position as required.
tubes extending to the rear.
4. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench. 7

5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
Front Lifting Point
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Rear Lifting Point

6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On Single NOTE:
Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb-
lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver
toward the wheel. On 3500 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) in order to lower the jack.
trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is
being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace NOTE:
the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has TO STOW THE FLAT O R S PARE
been lowered.
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement 1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the lug it properly across the wheel opening.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until 2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
each nut has been tightened twice Ú page 438. If in facing outward. Push the end of the winch’s cable,
doubt about the correct tightness, have them spring and steel sleeve through the back of the road
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized wheel. Making sure the valve stem is facing the
dealer or service station. ground when the wheel is stowed.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped) places provided.
8. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel

blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in
cap damage.
Reinstalling The Retainer
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
3. Lay the wheel flat after the retainer is installed. 5. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
4. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
extensions through the access hole between the mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and be overtightened. Push against the tire several times
into the winch mechanism tube. to ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE:
CAUTION! Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other WARNING!
power tools is not recommended and can damage the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
winch.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the 3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or storage position holding the jack by the jack
replaced immediately. turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so
that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the
floor.
REINSTALLING T HE JACK A ND T OOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
7
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly.
Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly
clips. Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn
Stowing The Flat Or Spare the jack turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
Jack Hold Down Fastener

NOTE: For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) models, use the
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly slides into flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull off the hub cap.
the front hold down location. Find the opening in the hub cap, insert the lug wrench, and
pull off the cap. If you need to pry against the wheel,
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor
protect the wheel surface.
pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
CAUTION!
 Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW), you must  The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pull
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS — first remove the hub caps—use the procedure noted for off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
I F EQUIPPED the single rear wheel. For the wheel covers (wheel skins), handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
insert the flat end of the lug wrench between the outer
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle edge of the wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the
off the ground. wheel to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to ease
around the wheel until the cover pops off.
the installation. Align the wheel cover vent holes to the
CAUTION!
wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel cover as needed to
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear firmly seat it evenly around the wheel.
wheel covers. Damage can occur to the center cap
and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
JUMP STARTING WARNING!

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
WARNING! flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.  Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
Battery Location could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
If equipped, the positive battery post may be covered with
CAUTION! a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on
booster source with a system voltage greater than
or around the post.
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, WARNING!
alternator or electrical system may occur. 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF. Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical

result in personal injury or property damage due to 7
NOTE: battery explosion.
accessories.
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach apply the CAUTION!
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START parking brake, make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
engine compartment, behind the driver side headlight WARNING!
or the discharged vehicle.
assembly.  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two batteries, the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
jump start off the driver side battery. switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
Connecting The Jumper Cables 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
WARNING! jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark protective cap over the positive (+) post.
NOTE:
could cause the battery to explode and could result in If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.
personal injury. you should have the battery and charging system
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper inspected at an authorized dealer.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then CAUTION!
the negative (-) post of the booster battery. start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper battery. power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame CAUTION! enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt. will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
The ground must be away from the battery and the Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical prevent the engine from starting.
fuel injection system.
current will blow the fuse.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following discon-

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
nection procedure. 6–S PEED TRANSMISSION
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
discharged battery.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster
battery. 3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
Jump Starting Label 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a depleted
column, and push and hold the override release lever battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
up. To activate the Manual Park Release see the following
steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just
above the parking brake release handle, below and to
the left of the steering column.
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location MANUAL PARK RELEASE

8–S PEED TRANSMISSION
7
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In Manual Park Release Access Cover
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with 3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park of the lever) to the right.
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
Gear Selector Override Access Port to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged

position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
driver's seat. Release the locking tab and verify that 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its an authorized dealer.
the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
to secure the lever. Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
released position.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever  Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
is locked in its stowed position.  Strong smell of coolant
 White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
 Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
Manual Park Release Tether the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Manual Park Release Tether In Stowed Position
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle. 4. Reinstall the access cover.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to the

HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE WARNING!
overheating by taking the appropriate action. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
 On highways — slow down. often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes. the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
 Turn off the A/C. The A/C system adds heat to the maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help or racing the engine. no matter what the speed.
remove this heat.
NOTE:
 Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
 For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmission,
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
CAUTION!
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
cooling system.
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
CAUTION!
 Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull before rocking the vehicle Ú page 297. Once the to free a stuck vehicle. 7
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into to restore “ESC On” mode. DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
result.
immediately and call for service.
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 219.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System Ú page 155 must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in N (Neutral)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN CAUTION!
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment mode, not the ACC mode.  Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is Vehicle damage may occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to discharged, find instructions on shifting the transmission
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/  When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
out of PARK Ú page 363.
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws attach to front or rear suspension components.
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF the
wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. ground. Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission flatbed are as follows: flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels  The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a end on a towing dolly.
OFF the ground) under the following conditions: towing dolly
CAUTION!
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instructions  Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the front wheels in the straight position with the rear  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
engine is off Ú page 363. wheels raised when and the front wheels ON the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
ground. damage to the transmission or transfer case will
 The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
 The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km) CAUTION!
for 8–speed transmission.  Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
 The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) transfer case damage. Damage from improper
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
for 6–speed transmission. towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Warranty.
7
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — WARNING! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

I F EQUIPPED  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains (EARS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks. may break, causing serious injury or death.
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
NOTE:  Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Response System.
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury. This feature is a communication network that takes effect
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
in the event of an impact Ú page 328.
vehicle.
CAUTION! EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for tow (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
vehicle. performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 330.
Front Tow Hooks

369
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
NOTE:
 It is recommended that every 3,000 miles (4,800 km),
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
CAUTION! check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after a
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may referring to the steps described under instrument cluster
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
result in damage to the vehicle. display Ú page 104. accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
For gasoline engines, under no circumstances should oil level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),  Severe service (high ambient temperature, short trips,
indicator system. This system will alert you when it is time 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever heavy loading, trailer towing, off-road, or law enforce-
to change your engine oil by displaying the words comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is ment use) may reduce oil change intervals.
“Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster display. The generally only a concern for fleet customers.
For Diesel Engines, configured with optional B20
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, For diesel engines, under no circumstances should oil capability are operated with greater than 5% levels of
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or biodiesel, the oil change interval must not exceed
depending on your personal driving style. Failure to 12 months, whichever comes first or sooner if prompted 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours, whichever
change the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can by the oil change indicator system. comes first under any circumstances. See the Fuel
result in internal engine damage. Requirements section for more information regarding
operation with biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467.
8
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Perform Service Indicator — Diesel Engine Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:  Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set  Check engine oil level.  Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
interval. To help remind you when this maintenance is  Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it parking brake.
due, the instrument cluster will display “Perform Service”. occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.  Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
When the “Perform Service” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster it is necessary to have the emissions  Check windshield washer fluid level.  Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped with
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake serviceable fittings.
include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) master cylinder and power steering and fill as needed.  Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or
filter element. The procedure for clearing and resetting the off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air
 Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
“Perform Service” indicator message is located in the cleaner filter.
appropriate Service Information. At Each Oil Change
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air
 Change the engine oil and filter. Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent
 Inspect the exhaust system. if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
 Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system receipts.
turns on. NOTE:
 Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge pivot
terminals as required. joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
MAINTENANCE P LAN — G ASOLINE E NGINE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
Change engine oil.
whichever comes first.
Additional Inspections
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
X X X X X X X
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear
oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If
X X X X X X X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road 8
or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace spark plugs. 1 X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent X X
trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL ENGINE
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
(Whichever Comes First):
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change engine oil every 15,000 miles

(24,000 km) or 12 months or
500 Hours or sooner if prompted by X X X X X X X X X X
the oil change indicator system,
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
tank, refill if necessary.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate —
If equipped with serviceable fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8
Inspect engine air cleaner filter,
X X X X X X X X X X
replace if necessary. 1
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod

ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks
and all parts for damage, wear, X X X X X X X X X X
improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel
X X X X X X X X X X
filter.
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the front and rear axle

surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
X X X X X X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing
change the axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police, X X X X X
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
X X X X
(AS69RC transmission only).
8
and sump filter (AS69RC transmission X X
only).
and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, fleet, or X X
frequent trailer towing (68RFE
transmission only).
X
and filter(s).
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
7,500
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace Crankcase Ventilation

X X
Filter (CCV).
Flush and replace power steering fluid. X
Flush and replace engine coolant. *** X
1. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local authorized dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
6.7L DIESEL E NGINE — 6-S PEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6.7L DIESEL E NGINE — 6-S PEED AS69RC HD
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL ADDING W ASHER FLUID MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and the fluid Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the You will never have to add water, and periodic
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator maintenance is not required.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
warmed up engine is shut off. some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe WARNING!
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
There are four possible dipstick types: cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
 Crosshatched zone. information can be found on most washer fluid containers. eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. amounts of water Ú page 361.
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of WARNING!
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Commercially available windshield washer solvents are or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must booster battery or any other booster source with an
and the MAX ends of the range. be exercised when filling or working around the washer output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
solution. clamps to touch each other.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch  Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
markings on the dipstick. After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or handling.
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
of the range marking. washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
CAUTION! to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
CAUTION!
Service Manuals are available which include detailed Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
 It is essential when replacing the cables on the Ú page 446.
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi- NOTE:
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may American Petroleum Institute (API)
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being Approved Engine Oil
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery assessed against you.
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
posts and free of corrosion. API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
WARNING!
oils.
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the You can be badly injured working on or around a motor The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
PRESSURE WASHING 5W-40 engine oil.
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure ENGINE OIL For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content
washer is not recommended. may produce damaging deposits on cylinder
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine head valves and/or after treatment system damage.
CAUTION! Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid A maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
Ú page 446. recommended for all oil used in the engine.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
NOTE: The same oil change interval is to be followed for synthetic
connections however, the pressure generated by these
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after startup oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also, synthetic oil must 8
machines is such that complete protection against
and then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This meet the same performance specifications as petroleum
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
is normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic oil.
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short
distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
special tools, and equipment to perform all service an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
operations in an expert manner. changes or extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see
the nearest authorized dealer.
Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for Replacement — Gasoline Engine
use synthetic API approved engine oils. replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters NOTE:
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on vehicles
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine, replace with a dry
numbers should not be used. SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements. (non-oiled) filter only.
Materials Added To Engine Oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER 1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners on
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369. engine air cleaner filter cover.
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental WARNING!
additives.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
Filters backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, near the engine compartment before starting the
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
station or governmental agency for advice on how and personal injury.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area. Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
ENGINE OIL FILTER The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
every engine oil change. ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine air cleaners
are a high quality filter and are recommended. 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
assembly. CAUTION! engine air cleaner filter.
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
screws or damage may result. assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and

Replacement — Diesel Engine
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Using a suitable tool, fully loosen (six) fasteners on
engine air cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter. 8
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward. 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE:

WARNING! Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants compressor oil and refrigerants.
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter. approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
1. Install the engine air cleaner into the housing
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
inspection surface facing downward.
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the Warranty Information Book, for further warranty Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
housing assembly locating tabs. information. a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
3. Tighten (6) screws to secure the engine air cleaner  The air conditioning system contains refrigerant recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
filter cover to the housing assembly. under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any equipment.
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be NOTE:
CAUTION! done by an experienced technician. Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
Always observe the position of the trailer and compressor oil, and refrigerants.
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to avoid Cabin Air Filter Replacement
damage to the truck or trailer. CAUTION!
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
start of each warm season. This service should include mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — operating, the blower can contact hands and may
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. R-134a — (If Equipped) propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind 3. There are travel stops on both sides of the glove 4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure compartment. Push inward on right side of the glove tabs on each end of the filter cover.
to replace the filter: compartment travel stop to disengage the stop. Then
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all pull the right of the glove compartment outward
contents. (away from the hinge) to disengage the right side of
the compartment from the hinge. Continue by
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the removing the left side from the hinge by slightly
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by lowering the compartment while pulling outward until
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove it is completely disengaged from the hinge.
compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove
compartment door and release into dash panel.
Filter Cover
Glove Compartment
Right Side Of Glove Compartment 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop 8
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Door
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
Filter Cover Removal

1 — Finger Tabs
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of 7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges. 9. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
the housing. 8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
the glove compartment sides. compartment door.
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION

WARNING!
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time regardless
Cabin Air Filter of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter Glove Compartment  You can be badly injured working on or around a
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
click. have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
CAUTION! 3 — Glove Compartment Door service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly NOTE:
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove
often. compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that  Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new If water is detected in the water separator while the engine
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are belt is installed) is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position,
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate and an
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) audible chime will be heard five times. At this point you
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be should stop the engine and drain the water from both of
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component the filters.
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment. CAUTION!
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
START the engine before you drain water from the fuel
at an authorized dealer.
filters to avoid engine damage.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a single
chime is heard while you are driving, or with the ignition
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located on the switch in the ON position, there may be a problem with
driver's side of the engine. The best access to this water your water separator wiring or sensor. See an authorized
drain valve is from under the hood. The second one is on dealer for service.
the under body, located in front of the rear axle above the
Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel filters,
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) drive shaft. The best access to this water drain valve is
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain illuminated for
from under the vehicle.
approximately 10 seconds. If the water was drained while
Conditions that would require replacement:
the engine was running, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light
 Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from CAUTION! may remain on for approximately three minutes.
belt body)  Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
8
NOTE:
 Rib or belt wear engine is running. Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your
 Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can
 Belt slips Drain the filter into an appropriate container. present a problem to the environment. Contact an autho-
rized dealer, service station, or government agency for
 Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids
position on pulley) and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the Water In ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL F ILTER CAUTION!
Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within 10 minutes of vehicle
shutdown, turn the engine mounted filter drain valve REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
(located on the side of the filter assembly) Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
counterclockwise 1/4 turn, and turn the under body
NOTE:
mounted filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the  Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
filter assembly) counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn the turer's filtration and water separating requirements filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
ignition switch to the ON position, and allow any can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
 The engine mounted filter housing is equipped with a
until all water and contaminants have been removed. prime the fuel system.
No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine will not run if:
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain valve following
these guidelines:  No filter is installed.
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you feel  Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM
filter is required to ensure vehicle will run. 2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
resistance from the internal seal.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn counter-
2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to properly clockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
compress the seal. the approved container.
NOTE: 4. Close the water drain valve.
Over-compression of the seal due to over-tightening of the
drain will damage the seal, cause a leak, and require the 5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. Rotate
entire sensor to be replaced. counterclockwise for removal. Remove used o-ring
and discard it.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing
The sensor drain should not be over-tightened during and dispose of according to your local regulations.
normal service operations to avoid internal damage and
future fuel leaks. The drain should be closed and secured
without the use of tools.
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions Ú page 390. 1 — Drain Valve
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and 1. Ensure engine is turned off.
housing. 2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter 3. Open the water drain valve one full turn counter-
housing and lubricate with clean engine oil. clockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag and the approved container.
install into housing. 4. Close the water drain valve.
NOTE: 5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. Rotate
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach this step counterclockwise for removal. Remove used o-ring
in order to keep cartridge clean. and discard it.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is properly 6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing
seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel. Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly and dispose of according to your local regulations.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft-lb 1 — Drain Valve 7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
(30.5 Nm). Do not overtighten the lid. housing.
12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and confirm 8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter
there are no leaks Ú page 390. CAUTION! housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
UNDERBODY M OUNTED FUEL FILTER  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. NOTE:
Drain the filter into an appropriate container. Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is reusable. Service kit comes
REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF sensor.
 Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
NOTE: filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
 Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac- into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
turer's filtration and water separating requirements install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to 8
can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. prime the fuel system.
 The underbody mounted filter housing will cause the
engine not to run if no filter is installed.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT WARNING! I NTERVENTION REGENERATION

OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. STRATEGY — M ESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
They can be unstable under certain conditions and be The Cummins® diesel engine meets all Environmental
WARNING! hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty Diesel Engine
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the Emissions Standards, resulting in one of the lowest
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel emitting diesel engines ever produced.
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious CAUTION! To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is
injury or death. Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system. system. The engine and exhaust after-treatment system
work together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approx-
Engine Emissions Standards. These systems are
imately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L). NOTE: seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn  A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM spec- the Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The
ignition to the RUN position and wait approximately ification D-975 may be used with your Cummins® PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust
30 seconds. This will activate the in tank fuel pump. diesel engine. system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
Turn the ignition switch to the off position, and leave pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
off for at least 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure  A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-7467 may be used with your If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low
three times before cranking the engine.
Cummins® diesel engine. engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” system will automatically enter an emissions operating
procedure Ú page 128.  Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can nega-
mode that will increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM.
tively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle for a While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain the
from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system
minimum of 30 seconds. Diesel Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
corrosion or damage.
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change
 Ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for in engine tone or a slight change in engine performance
CAUTION!
use with your Cummins® diesel engine. while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below
Do not engage the starter motor for more than  In addition, commercially available fuel additives are 20 mph (32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up to
15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the not necessary for the proper operation of your an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
cranking intervals. Cummins® diesel engine.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all
the fuel lines.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to BODY LUBRICATION Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
additional maintenance required on your truck or engine the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
Ú page 104. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, NOTE:
WARNING! tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
attention should also be given to hood latching periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
components to ensure proper function. When performing are experienced. This inspection should include the
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) other underhood services, the hood latch, release following points:
DEF sometimes known simply by the name of its active mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and  Wear or uneven edges
component, UREA—is a key component of Selective lubricated.
 Foreign material
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
 Hardening or cracking
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock  Deformation or fatigue
the presence of a catalyst to convert smog-forming Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
vapor Ú page 446. WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by contacting
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 8
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
Wiper Locking Assembly 2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the
arm and with one finger, push the release tab toward
the wiper arm.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm WARNING!
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from is in the full up position.  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and 2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm). the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
eventually poison you Ú page 348.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
the wiper blade under the locking tab. materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
arm until it is latched (engagement will be in areas where your exhaust system can contact
accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the anything that can burn.
latch release tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
CAUTION!
EXHAUST SYSTEM
 The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
system. and may seriously reduce engine performance and
1 — Wiper
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; cause serious damage to the engine.
2 — Locking Tab
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In 8
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
raised for lubrication or oil changes. Replace as required.
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter COOLING SYSTEM Engine Coolant Checks
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. WARNING! 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
NOTE:  You or others can be badly burned by hot engine appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
result in civil penalties being assessed against you. you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, condenser or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. or the back of the radiator core.
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at
should be obtained immediately. fan starts automatically and may start at any time, the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: whether the engine is running or not. system for leaks.
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is  When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon- DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
in gear and the vehicle is in motion. nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
vehicle.
NOTE:
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition components Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
or malfunctioning operating conditions. to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
Selection Of Coolant Adding Coolant  Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
For further information Ú page 446. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
NOTE: reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine engine cooling system.
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To NOTE:
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro- prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant level of protection against freezing according to the
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally vehicle. operated.
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
Please review these recommendations for using Organic  Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant: needed to be added to the system, please contact a
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant local authorized dealer.
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT  Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
Material Standard MS.90032. coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
ator. that meets the requirements of the manufacturer (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
8
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
mended.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Cooling System Pressure Cap Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the engine which contains aluminum components.
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/ bottle when the engine is cold.
recovery tank if so equipped.  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze).  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
WARNING! operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle condenser clean.
need only be checked once a month. When additional  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
 Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up Cooling System Notes
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, NOTE:
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers CHARGE A IR C OOLER — I NTER-C OOLER
hot or under pressure.
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of The charge air cooler is positioned below the radiator and
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat through the air cleaner and passes through the
damage may result.
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter turbocharger, where it is pressurized. This pressurized air
the radiator. rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed
Disposal Of Used Coolant through a hose to the charge air cooler and through
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. The air
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be entering the engine has been cooled by about 50° to
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. 100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling process enables more
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills bottle must also be protected against freezing. hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks
immediately. or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced
 If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
engine performance.
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid Special Additives
system components should be inspected periodically Ú page 448. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
Ú page 369. severely damage your brake system and/or impair its special additives in the transmission. Automatic
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
WARNING! vehicle is also identified on the original factory performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois- transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in transmissions.
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake in a tightly closed container. Keep the master Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake affect seals.
in an emergency. fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause CAUTION!
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked result in a collision. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
when performing under the hood service or immediately if Warranty.
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure.
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder avoid its contact with these surfaces.
area before removing cap. 8
 Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check This could result in a collision.
should be conducted.
For further information Ú page 448.
Fluid Level Check — 8-Speed Transmission Use the following procedure to check the transmission The fluid level should be between the “HOT” (upper)
fluid level properly: reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine 1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the
instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
as required to reach the normal operating overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid Ú page 448.
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
temperature. If the transmission is not functioning After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
check your transmission fluid level using special service
properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
tools.
following Note and Caution about checking the fluid fully drain into the transmission before rechecking
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, level at colder temperatures. the fluid level.
visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the
2. Park the vehicle on level ground. NOTE:
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
Oil level check can only be performed with the 44 inch
with an improper fluid level can cause severe 3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least
dipstick blade with oil level indicator holes. If the vehicle is
transmission damage. 60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the
equipped with the 15 inch dipstick then a service dipstick
rest of this procedure.
will be required to check the oil.
CAUTION! 4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized pedal.
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may 5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
adjust the fluid level accurately. engage in each position), ending with the
transmission in PARK.
Fluid Level Check — 6-Speed Transmission 6. Remove the dipstick by unlocking the cap, wipe it
clean and reinsert it until seated.
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (158-176°F / 70-80°C). 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid 15 Inch Dipstick
the transmission temperature in the instrument cluster if the actual level is at or above the hole.
screen Ú page 104.
8. Reinsert the dipstick until fully seated and lock it

down. The bending of the blade will orient the cap in CAUTION!
the correct position. Do not force or rotate the cap Using a transmission fluid other than the
into another position. Check for leaks. Release the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
parking brake. deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed
and filter changes Ú page 448.
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
of the vehicle. AXLE FLUID L EVEL
44 Inch Dipstick Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
NOTE: required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
If it is necessary to check the transmission below the oper- contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason. the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
ating temperature, the fluid level should be between the inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at Fluid And Filter Changes — 6-Speed level Ú page 448. This inspection should be made with
60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region of the
dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level
Transmission the vehicle in a level position.
after a transmission service or fluid change. Recheck the For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369. To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a level surface.
fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission Take a piece of wire (or zip tie) and make a 90 degree
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid bend two inches from the end of the wire. Insert the wire
reaches normal operating temperature. becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the into the fill plug hole and use it like a dipstick. Remove the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
CAUTION! wire and measure from the 90 degree bend to the oil level. 8
Selection Of Lubricant For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the fluid level
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the
register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use fill hole for the rear axle and it should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the front axle.
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid. Ú page 448. It is important to maintain the transmission For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model axles, the
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm)
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only below the fill hole on the 9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle,
the approved lubricant should be used. and 12.0 in rear axle.
Drain And Refill Drain And Refill Required Maintenance For Noise Control
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369. Systems
Lubricant Selection Selection Of Lubricant The following maintenance services must be performed
every six months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever
For further information Ú page 448. Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid comes first, to ensure proper operation of the noise
NOTE: Ú page 448. control systems. In addition, inspection and service should
be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in
corrosion and possible failure of differential components.
NOISE CONTROL S YSTEM REQUIRED suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle will
Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered MAINTENANCE & WARRANTY help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
in some off-highway types of service, will require draining Exhaust System
and refilling the axle to avoid damage. All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged
Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited slip oil United States are required to comply with the Federal parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, and U-bolts
additive (friction modifiers). Government's Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles should be tight and in good condition. Damaged
NOTE: can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label components, burned or blown out mufflers, burned or
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while located in the operator's compartment. rusted out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to
turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete the procedures and specifications outlined in the
or dry pavement. These conditions should be considered appropriate service manual.
normal operation of the limited slip differential. Air Cleaner Assembly
TRANSFER C ASE Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
Fluid Level Check and that the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
air cleaner for tightness. The air filter element must also
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
be clean and serviced according to the instructions
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
outlined in the Scheduled Maintenance section of this
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
manual.
Tampering With Noise Control System Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are Noise Emission Warranty
the following:
Prohibited The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
AIR CLEANER manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed, built
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any  Removal of the air cleaner. and equipped to conform at the time it left the
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or manufacturer's control with all applicable US EPA Noise
 Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air
replacement, of any device or element of design Control Regulations.
cleaner housing.
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
 Removal of the air ducting.
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle EXHAUST SYSTEM particular part, component or system of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed  Removal of, or rendering inoperative exhaust system manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
or rendered inoperative by any person. components including the muffler or tailpipe. assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
the time it left the manufacturer's control, caused noise
 Removal of, or rendering inoperative the fan clutch. emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
 Removal of the fan shroud. this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
8
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000

KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
FUSES CAUTION!
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
General Information If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take compartment near the battery. This center contains
care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the windshield cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
WARNING! wiper motors with water. A description of each fuse and component may be
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another current. corresponds to the following chart.
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous CAUTION!
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse  When installing the power distribution center cover,
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place vehicle battery discharge.
water to get into the power distribution center and
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. possibly result in an electrical system failure.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.  If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition windshield wiper motor with water.
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer. 8
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
Blade Fuses
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Mtr
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI / Lo *

* If Equipped
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter
F05 50 Amp Red – Air Suspension Comp
F06 40 Amp Green – STOM
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor *
30 Amp Pink Gas – Brake Vacuum Pump *
F09 –
40 Amp Green Diesel – Fuel Heater *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake SYS MOD ECU & Valves
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blwr Mtr
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart - Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch * 8
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
20 Amp Blue Gas – ECM *
F22 –
25 Amp White Diesel – PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light

* If Equipped
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B / U
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow Park
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Mod *
F34 30 Amp Pink – VSIM #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel HTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – ITBM *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Vented Seats *
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter / Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Strng Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coils *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod *
F51 – 10 Amp Red IGN Mod / KINMod / RFHub
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow – Lt Turn/Stop
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non-Memory Adj Pedals *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Fwd Utility Lamps
F56 – 10 Amp Red VBV
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Trans PRSR SW
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare 8
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / PCM *
F65 – 10 Amp Red RVDMP / MOD BLE *
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB RR * / RR Mirror/ Passenger Wind SW
F67 – 10 Amp Red UCI / TRLR 360 Cam/ Tach *

* If Equipped
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Mod 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Mtr / Fuel Htr RLY
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amp / Act Noise Cnsl
F72 – – Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm
F75 – 10 Amp Red SCR RLY / ATMM *
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC) *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / TCM / FAD MOD / STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue ECM / PCM / IRCM / AUX Relay Feed / HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lt
F80 – 10 Amp Red Ovrdh Con / Assist / 911
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow RT Turn / Stop
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control
F83 – 10 Amp Red TLR AST / TLR RVS CTL / TLR KNB
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / R Heated Seats SW
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp / ITBM / SCCM / TLR TPM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster

* If Equipped
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Batt
F91 – – Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – 10 Amp Red Invertor MOD / USB-IP / WCPM *
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW / TRL TPM - GTWY
F95 – 10 Amp Red RR CAM / PRKTRNX/ CHMSL Cam / Bld SPT SNR / SVUE CAM *
F96 – 10 Amp Red TRL Cam *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST PSGR *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST DRIVER *
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / IN-CARTS / CSG / TRL CWY MOD */ TACH
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter Box Feed *
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Right *
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Left / Run RLY #3 *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS * 8
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base
bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
Please see an authorized dealer for LED replacement
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam LED
Low & High Beam LED
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal LED
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Exterior Bulbs
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED
Base Tail/Backup Lamp W21/5W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps LED
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp LED
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) LED
Base Turn/Tail Lamp PWY24W
Rear License Plate Lamp LED
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained 8
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN — through this access hole.
IF EQUIPPED
Low Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house 6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to 3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to
splash shield and disengage the bulb access cover by unlock the bulb from the lamp. find the high beam bulb access cover.
rotating counterclockwise. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage the
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
and covers. 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
High Beam
See the following steps to replace: CAUTION!
1. Open the hood.
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or
Bulb Access Cover the lamp wiring.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
unlock the bulb from the lamp.
CAUTION!
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily 8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. and covers.
Bulb Access Cover
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or
the lamp wiring.
Outer Front Park And Turn 4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house Halogen
See the following steps to replace: splash shield and disengage the side marker socket See the following steps to replace:
by rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.
1. Open the hood. 1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/bumper to
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. access the back of the front fog lamp housing.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front 2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over from the fog lamp bulb.
the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained unlock the bulb from the housing.
through this access hole.
Park And Turn Sockets

5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
and covers. Fog Lamp Bulb
Splash Shield Access Cover
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 8
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED and
CAUTION!
Halogen front fog lamps.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
BACKUP LAMPS WITH CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace: See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws and pushpins that pass 1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
through the bed sheet metal. the body as shown.
Tail Lamp Removed

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Tail Lamp Locations CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
1 — Tail Lamp CAUTION! 2. Separate the connector holding the housing and
2 — Screws Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with wiring harness to the body.
3 — Fasteners your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily 3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn and
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. remove the socket and bulb from housing.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the 6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
outboard side of the lamp housing from the two housing.
plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side
panel.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket. CAB TOP CLEARANCE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED REAR LAMP BAR ID MARKER (DUAL REAR
See the following steps to replace: WHEELS) — IF EQUIPPED
1. Remove the screws from the top of the lamp. See the following steps to replace:
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain
access to the bulb sockets.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
CAUTION!
Screw Location From Clearance Lamp
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily 2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull it from
the lamp assembly. Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counterclockwise to
access the bulb.
 Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
 Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 8
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and and housing.
housing.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp

3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.
SIDE MARKER LAMPS (DUAL REAR WHEELS) — Tire Markings NOTE:

IF EQUIPPED  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
See the following steps to replace:
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
Tire Markings letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Side Marker Lamp Locations 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
(TIN) emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender. 2 — Size Designation spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counterclockwise and 3 — Service Description Example: T145/80D18 103M.
remove from assembly to access the bulb. 4 — Maximum Load  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket. dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
5 — Maximum Pressure the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs
and housing. 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description: 8
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
EXAMPLE:
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original 8
Tire Placard
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the:
NOTE: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
door.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tires.
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle. Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
Tire And Loading Information Placard
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard Ú page 203.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) trailer towing Ú page 203.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
Tire And Loading Information Placard The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of  For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
Limit— luggage and cargo being loaded on the (392 kg).
(1) Locate the statement “The combined vehicle. That weight may not safely
weight of occupants and cargo should exceed the available cargo and luggage
WARNING!
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
vehicle's placard. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
load from your trailer will be transferred your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
(2) Determine the combined weight of load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
the driver and passengers that will be to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
riding in your vehicle. determine how this reduces the
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION
available cargo and luggage load
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the Tire Pressure
capacity of your vehicle.
driver and passengers from XXX kg or Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
Metric Example For Load Limit
XXX lbs. satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will are affected by improper tire pressure:
(4) The resulting figure equals the be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg  Safety
available amount of cargo and luggage (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.  Fuel Economy
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” NOTE:  Tread Wear
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability 8
be five 150 lb passengers in your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
vehicle, the amount of available cargo table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. with varying seating configurations and number and
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
Safety Fuel Economy Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
WARNING! resulting in higher fuel consumption. defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can Tread Wear (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cause collisions. cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
overheating and tire failure. for earlier tire replacement. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause temperature changes.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
damage that result in tire failure. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle Tire Inflation Pressures when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the the Winter.
vehicle control.
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. At least once a month: outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
You could lose control of your vehicle. inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right judgement when determining proper inflation. outside temperature condition.
or left. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- underinflated. during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
mended cold tire inflation pressure.  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
CAUTION!
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
or over responsiveness in the steering. reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
NOTE: and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair NOTE:

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
meets the following criteria: a flat tire condition.
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  The tire has not been driven on when flat. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
 The damage is only on the tread section of your tire mode Ú page 309.
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
 The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm). Tire Spinning
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
loading and cold tire inflation pressures. additional information. spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
WARNING! For further information Ú page 365.
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). WARNING!
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity designed to be reused. by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
Radial Ply Tires (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WARNING! Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a 8
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
changed after being driven under a Run Flat mode 14 psi
types of tires.
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire NOTE:

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
help you in determining when your tires should be including, but not limited to:
replaced. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
 Driving style.
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures with oil, grease, and gasoline.
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Replacement Tires
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
replacement. characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
 Distance driven. wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced when replacement is needed Ú page 424. Refer to the
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
Tire Tread WARNING! found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more information
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Ú page 416.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
replaced. sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or TIRE TYPES Snow Tires
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use All Season Tires — If Equipped during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
between different all season tires. All season tires can be size and type to the original equipment tires.
WARNING!
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; so may adversely affect the safety and handling
rating other than that specified for your vehicle. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and of your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels handling of your vehicle.
may change suspension dimensions and perfor- Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
Summer Or Three Season Tires — was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This If Equipped operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
steering and suspension components. You could conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be pressures.
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
load ratings approved for your vehicle. driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
other than what was originally equipped on your
contact an authorized dealer. studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
before using these tire types.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
control and have a collision. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED 8
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
CAUTION! could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
Damage to the vehicle may result.
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may possibility of loss of vehicle control.
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use Ú page 213.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire WARNING!

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
And Wheel — If Equipped the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
pattern. in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M. Collapsible spare tire description Full Size Spare — If Equipped
example: 165/80-17 101P. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity. tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel opportunity.
on the vehicle at any given time.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by NOTE:
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh the water droplets from the brake components. This
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. protective coating that helps keep them from corroding prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle and tarnishing.
handling. Since it is not the same as your original Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic CAUTION!
WARNING! solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
or equivalent is recommended.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent SNOW TRACTION D EVICES
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
8
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
traction devices are recommended. Follow these
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
recommendations to guard against damage:
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and  Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire,
CAUTION!
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using as recommended by the snow traction device manu-
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, facturer.
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
snow traction device.
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
hot to the touch. car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is  Please see the following table for the recommended
recommended. tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device

2500 4x2 (2WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size (Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Trim Level
Or Equivalent)
LT245/70R17E
Tradesman
LT275/70R18E
Bighorn
Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
Laramie
LT285/60R20E
Longhorn
Limited LT285/60R20E

2500 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Or Equivalent)
LT245/70R17E
Tradesman LT285/70R17D
LT275/70R18E
Bighorn
Laramie LT275/70R18E
Rear U Class
Limited LT285/60R20E
Longhorn
LT285/70R17D
Power Wagon LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E

3500 SRW 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman LT275/70R18E
Bighorn
Limited Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
Laramie LT285/60R20E
Longhorn

3500 DRW 4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Longhorn
8

3500 DRW 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Laramie
Longhorn
WARNING! CAUTION! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)  Install device as tightly as possible and then Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto- different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. sock traction devices do not require retightening. braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
CAUTION!  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
following precautions:  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
 Because of restricted traction device clearance  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- smooth, quiet ride.
between tires and other suspension components, it tions on the method of installation, operating speed, For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369. More
is important that only traction devices in good condi- and conditions for use. Always use the suggested frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs less than 30 mph (48 km/h). rotation being performed.
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the  Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”  If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
not apply to some directional tires that must not be in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
reversed. in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the
On/Off-Road tire and the use of Outline White
Letter (OWL) tires.
Tire Rotation
 When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
NOTE: remounted on the rim, or installed at a different loca-
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information tion, to maintain the correct placement of the tire on
System (TPIS): the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)  The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses truck. For example, if the spare is used to replace an
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched. tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position.
 After a tire rotation is completed, as shown, the system
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires. learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition 8
status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over
5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You
may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower
speeds and stops.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION TREADWEAR TRACTION G RADES

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The Treadwear grade is a comparative The Traction grades, from highest to
The following tire grading categories rating, based on the wear rate of the tire lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
were established by the National when tested under controlled conditions represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. on a specified government test course. pavement, as measured under
The specific grade rating assigned by the For example, a tire graded 150 would controlled conditions on specified
tire's manufacturer in each category is wear one and one-half times as well on government test surfaces of asphalt and
shown on the sidewall of the tires on the government course as a tire graded concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
your vehicle. 100. The relative performance of tires traction performance.
depends upon the actual conditions of
All passenger vehicle tires must conform their use, however, and may depart
WARNING!
to Federal safety requirements in significantly from the norm due to The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
addition to these grades. variations in driving habits, service include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
practices, and differences in road traction characteristics.
characteristics and climate.

TEMPERATURE G RADES WARNING! BODYWORK

The Temperature grades are A (the The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, AGENTS
resistance to the generation of heat and either separately or in combination, can cause heat
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested build-up and possible tire failure.
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
under controlled conditions on a roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. STORING THE VEHICLE sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
Sustained high temperature can cause If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks, parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
we recommend that you take the following steps to contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
the material of the tire to degenerate minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery: operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
and reduce tire life, and excessive  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
temperature can lead to sudden tire  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
failure. The grade C corresponds to a (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
level of performance, which all fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
resistance built into your vehicle.
passenger vehicle tires must meet adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility What Causes Corrosion?
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety of compressor damage when the system is started
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
again.
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A and protective coatings from your vehicle.
8
represent higher levels of performance The most common causes are:
on the laboratory test wheel, than the  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
minimum required by law.  Stone and gravel impact.

 Insects, tree sap and tar.
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK Fascia/Bumper Care

The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the
Cleaning Headlights Washing chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle debris and salt using an automotive soap. Fascia/
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car bumpers should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
breakage than glass headlights. wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water. Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- corrosion.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and and Tar Remover to remove. caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride,
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh
by rinsing. your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the chemicals or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
paint. protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel and tarnishing.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care — CAUTION!
If Equipped CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials damage the fascia/bumper’s protective finish. Such
cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and such as steel wool or scouring powder that will damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Mopar® Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant. scratch metal and painted surfaces. Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
paint and decals. solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the fascia/bumper’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended.
Special Care To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
at least twice per year using the Mopar® Spray-On pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed.
month. Bedliner Conditioner available at a local authorized If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of dealer. pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the
open. Bedliner: metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any or gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar®
touch them up immediately. loose dirt and debris. Quick Repair Kit.
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush. INTERIORS
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar® Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
packaged and sealed.
wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner. carpeting.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel. WARNING!
WARNING!
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
match the color of your vehicle.
slippery and may result in personal injury. areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped 8
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs
exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as
time. possible to avoid permanent damage.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
If Equipped properly. Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
NOTE:
 Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop CAUTION!
with a clean, dry towel. for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
 Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. until all residue is removed. suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
 For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a mild
WARNING! cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision  Damage caused by these type of products may not
 For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
 Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have Lenses
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
Seat Belt Maintenance take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical for inspection. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER S URFACES NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
leather upholstery. darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular and FCA recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn CAUTION! equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result. towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or directly on the mirror.
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
8
438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
panel, visible through the windshield. repeated brake applications with the engine off), the the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle. the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
braking capability, the remaining system will still function socket.
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
Lug Nut/
of the Brake Warning Light and/or the Anti-Lock Brake Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ **Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
System (ABS) Warning Light during brake use. Bolt Torque Bolt Type Bolt Size
Size
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST — 130 ft-lb
Cone
(176 N·m)
I F E QUIPPED M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Vehicle Identification Number 129 ft-lb
The brake system power assist is provided by a Flanged
NOTE: (175 N·m)
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. steering system. You may experience some clicking or
hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
braking conditions. bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than
normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating
temperature.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts
are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts at the interface
between the lug nut/bolt and the washer. Do not oil wheel
studs.
Wheel Mounting Surface 8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns

Retighten the wheel nuts, in the same pattern, to the 1 — 10 Bolt Pattern
torques listed in the Torque Specifications table. Go 2 — 8 Bolt Pattern
through the sequence a second time to verify that the
specific torque has been achieved. Retighten to
specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check the lug It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
Two-Piece Lug Nut specifications at each lubrication interval.
properly tightened.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the

tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
9
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
especially important during the first few hundred miles/ considering service for the vehicle. rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated 6.4L E NGINE have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
15% in this engine.
to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt contains a higher level of detergents to further
circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut This engine is designed to meet all emissions
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
just previously tightened until final torque is achieved. regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
economy and performance when using high
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
WARNING! quality unleaded gasoline having a posted
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do Gasoline retailers.
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
in personal injury. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”. ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are diaphragm materials.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer system components.
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS  Poor engine performance. FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS

 Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.  Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. CAUTION!
CAUTION!
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
MODIFICATIONS
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
of these blends may result in starting and drivability Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in mance and damage the emissions control system.
problems, damage critical fuel system components, damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
Warranty.
15% ethanol (E-15). malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N  The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
GASOLINE these products contain high concentrations of meth-
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
Warranty. problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
VEHICLES MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline NOTE:
9
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Warranty. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: and California reformulated gasoline.
 Operate in a lean mode.

 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the
NOTE:
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline on your
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain
diesel vehicle, do not start the vehicle. If you restart
your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this provided on both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel
your vehicle you risk damaging the engine and fuel
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
system. Please call an authorized dealer for service.
Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid available in your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel  A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
damage to the emissions control system. may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up specification D-7467 may be used with your
performance. Cummins® diesel engine. (Models configured with
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel Fuel B20 Capability.)
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American Society
for Testing and Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15
CAUTION!  In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
will provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to not necessary for the proper operation of your
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to Cummins® diesel engine. However, if seasonably
START engine before you drain the water from the fuel
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged adjusted fuel is not available and you are operating
filter(s) to avoid engine damage Ú page 387.
periods, use Climatized Number 2 Diesel Fuel or dilute the below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel
No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1 Diesel Fuel. This will Treatment (or equivalent) may be beneficial to avoid
provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging FUEL S PECIFICATIONS fuel gelling.
of the fuel filters.  Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been developed used where extended arctic conditions (0°F or -18°C)
WARNING! to take advantage of the high energy content and exist.
generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Climatized Diesel Fuels.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and Experience has shown that it also operates on Number 1
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels or other fuels within
specification.
BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Within Six Months Of Manufacture Required Oil Change Interval
Pickup Models
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can result Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with the
Your vehicle has been validated and approved for the use in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to approved use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed 5%. To
of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20) provided that you ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides for protection ensure this limit is met your oil change interval must be
comply with the requirements outlined below. It is against fuel oxidation for up to six months. maintained to the following schedule:
important that you understand and comply with these
requirements. Failure to comply with Oil Change Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Ram PickUp 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 miles
(24,000 km)*
requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter
up to B20 will result in premature engine wear. Such wear (*unless otherwise notified with an oil service message.)
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Elements
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel filter CAUTION!
typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rapeseed elements in both your engine mounted filter and frame
mounted filter.  Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if operation
(SME or SOME) base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water occurs with greater than 5% biodiesel blends.
limitations which require that you understand and adhere accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/Cummins® Oil change intervals should not exceed 6 months in
to the following requirements if you use blends of filtration system is designed to provide adequate fuel either case. Failure to comply with these Oil Change
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than 20% water separation capabilities. requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel
(B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for the use of
B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient blends up to B20 may result in premature engine
wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
of blends greater than 20% can result in engine damage. Temperatures Limited Warranty.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
Warranty.  B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer severe
temperatures, which may pose problems for both storage
damage if operated with concentrations of biodiesel
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Standards and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low
higher than 20%.
ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only fuel heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold 9
produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following temperature additives.
specifications may be blended to meet biodiesel blend
(B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467:
 Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975
and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM specification
D-6751.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 gal 117 L
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 gal 121 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 gal 189 L
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 18.5 qt 17.5 L
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 gal 106 L
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 gal 117 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 gal 121 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 gal 189 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 gal 21 L
Engine Oil With Filter
Cooling System
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Engine Coolant
Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the
Engine Oil manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have
the API Donut trademark Ú page 381.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Engine Coolant
Technology).
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella
and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is
required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils is typically
Engine Oil located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell
Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil
category is required.
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating
Fuel Filters (chassis mounted filter). Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend using Mopar® CCV Filter.

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good
performance.
Fuel Selection
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic
conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup
models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard.
Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive assistance in locating DEF in
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French).
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the 9
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Automatic
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is required for limited
Front and Rear Axle slip axles. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111 Limited
Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Component
Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your
Automatic Transmission – 68RFE
transmission. We recommend Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the
Automatic Transmission – AS69RC
function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0 (Single Rear
Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual Rear Wheel) Rear axles.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. We recommend using the pre-mixed Mopar® lubricant and limited
slip additive. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111 Limited
Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
449
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
 Owner's name and address
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT with our products and services.
 Authorized dealer name
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
problem. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
PREPARE A L IST correctly and in a timely manner. Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or service manager first. If for some reason you are still not (Canada)
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the
service advisor know. Who is Covered
authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance center. Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
If you list a number of items and you must have your
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle your Warranty Information book. 1
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is 1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services 10
an appointment. are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
450 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
What to Do If eligible, we will reimburse you for the reasonable Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/ amount actually paid, based on the usual and customary Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a charges for that service in the area where they were nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA: provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for mailed to: This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
covered services, license plate number, and your location, FCA US LLC Customer Assistance period.
including the telephone number from which you are P.O. Box 9145 Battery Jump Assistance
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name Medford, MA 02155 No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If Attention Claims Department Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know. being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
authorities. The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions Lockout Service
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance and conditions of use, which are determined solely by Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or FCA US LLC. are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number Flat Tire Service phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a replacement keys.
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
service facility, for services rendered within 30 days of the (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual. Towing Service
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer This is not a permanent flat tire repair. Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
service eligibility. dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 451
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
P.O. Box 21–8004 HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
Phone: (866) 726-4636 To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, We appreciate that you have made a major investment
FCA C ANADA CUSTOMER CARE FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
P.O. Box 1621 Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the the ownership experience.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French dialing 1-800-380-2479. WARNING!
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
Bell Relay Service operator.
Mexico, D.F. other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 SERVICE CONTRACT contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle the State of California to cause cancer and birth
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected defects, or other reproductive harm.
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
FCA Caribbean LLC expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
P.O. Box 191857 endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
San Juan 00919-1857 protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
Phone: (866) 726-4636
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
Fax: (787) 782-3345 in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. 10
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions If you believe that your vehicle has a www.safercar.gov; or write to:
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle defect that could cause a crash or cause Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
and market.
injury or death, you should immediately Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
Use this QR code to access your digital
inform the National Highway Traffic D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
experience.
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in information about motor vehicle safety
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
MOPAR® PARTS vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 453
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
To order the following manuals, you may use either the assistance of service and engineering specialists to appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
website or the phone numbers listed below. acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
Service Manuals To access your Owner's Information online, visit 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a www.mopar.com/om (US) or 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/ www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
or components and is written in straightforward language Or susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals dos condiciones:
 1-800-890-4038 (US)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it interferencia perjudicial y
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to  1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
find and correct problems, using step-by-step operación no deseada.
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE:
equipment. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and authority to operate the equipment.
Procedure manuals, visit:
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation. 10
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
your address, please provide the following information Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: interferencia perjudicial y
and mail to: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
FCA US LLC with Innovation, Science and Economic Development interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
P.O. Box 21–8008 Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is operación no deseada.
subject to the following two conditions:
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 NOTE:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Make sure to include the following: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
2. This device must accept any interference received, party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
 Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy) including interference that may cause undesired authority to operate the equipment.
 Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID operation.
located on top left of the instrument panel) Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
 Exact Odometer Reading Science and Economic Development applicables aux
 First and Last Name appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
 Phone Number
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
 Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
 Email Address radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
*Applies to US residents only. susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
455
INDEX
A Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................................384 Automatic Transmission .....................................141, 399
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........................................384 Adding Fluid............................................................. 399
(Cruise Control) ................................................... 174, 175 Air Conditioner System .................................................384 Fluid And Filter Change........................................... 399
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 395 Air Conditioning............................................................... 59 Fluid Change ........................................................... 399
Adding Fuel.......................................................... 200, 201 Air Conditioning Filter ............................................62, 384 Fluid Level Check ...........................................397, 398
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 440 Air Conditioning System ................................................. 61 Fluid Type .......................................................399, 448
Adjust Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................61 Shifting..................................................................... 144
Down...........................................................................33 Air Filter .........................................................................382 Special Additives..................................................... 397
Forward ......................................................................33 Air Pressure Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ............... 142
Rearward ....................................................................33 Tires..........................................................................422 AutoPark ....................................................................... 126
Up................................................................................33 Alarm AUX Camera .................................................................. 196
Adjustable Pedals ...........................................................38 Panic........................................................................... 18 Auxiliary Driving Systems ............................................. 301
Advance Phone Connectivity ....................................... 270 Security Alarm...................................................24, 117 Axle Fluid.................................................... 399, 400, 448
Air Bag Alterations/Modifications Axle Lubrication ...................................................399, 400
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 325 Vehicle........................................................................ 12
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 323 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 395, 444 B
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 328, 368 Disposal ...................................................................396 Back Up Camera........................................................... 190
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 368 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................295 Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ....................................... 157
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 328 Anti-Lock Warning Light................................................118 Battery..................................................................116, 380
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 326 Assist, Hill Start.............................................................300 Blanket..................................................................... 134
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 329 Audio Settings...............................................................259 Charging System Light............................................ 116
Maintenance ........................................................... 329 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................225 Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 18
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 324 Auto Down Power Windows............................................73 Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 53
Transporting Pets.................................................... 346 Automatic Door Locks ....................................................28 Bed Divider ..................................................................... 85
Air Bag Light ...............................................115, 323, 346 Automatic Folding Mirrors.............................................. 43 Bed Step ......................................................................... 78
Air Cleaner, Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 50 Belts, Seat..................................................................... 346
Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........................ 382, 400 Automatic Tailgate Release ........................................... 76 Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 301
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 61
11
456
Bluetooth Cargo Light ...................................................................... 52 Cooling System ............................................................. 394

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or CD ..................................................................................261 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).................................... 395
Audio Device After Pairing ................................ 266 Cellular Phone...............................................................288 Coolant Level..................................................394, 396
Body Builders Guide .......................................................10 Center High Mounted Stop Light .................................414 Cooling Capacity...................................................... 444
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 391 Center Seat Storage Compartment ............................... 63 Disposal Of Used Coolant....................................... 396
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 420 Charge Air Cooler ..........................................................396 Drain, Flush, And Refill ........................................... 394
Brake Assist System .................................................... 296 Chart, Tire Sizing...........................................................417 Inspection................................................................ 396
Brake Control System .................................................. 296 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......124 Points To Remember .............................................. 396
Brake Fluid .......................................................... 397, 448 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................................346 Pressure Cap ........................................................... 396
Brake System ...................................................... 397, 438 Checks, Safety ..............................................................346 Radiator Cap............................................................ 396
Fluid Check.............................................................. 397 Child Restraint ..............................................................330 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 395, 444, 446
Master Cylinder....................................................... 397 Child Restraints Corrosion Protection .................................................... 433
Parking .................................................................... 138 Booster Seats ..........................................................333 Cruise Control (Speed Control)...........................174, 175
Warning Light .......................................................... 115 Child Seat Installation................................... 340, 341 Cruise Light..........................................................122, 123
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 141 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................339 Customer Assistance ................................................... 449
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 410 Infant And Child Restraints.....................................331 Cybersecurity ................................................................ 225
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 348, 410 Locating The LATCH Anchorages............................337
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............334 D
C Older Children And Child Restraints.......................332 Daytime Running Lights................................................. 50
Cab Top Clearance Lights............................................ 415 Seating Positions.....................................................334 Dealer Service .............................................................. 381
Camera ......................................................................... 190 Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................440 Defroster, Rear Window................................................. 59
Camera, AUX................................................................. 196 Cleaning Defroster, Windshield ........................................... 59, 346
Camera, Rear ...................................................... 190, 191 Wheels .....................................................................427 Deleting A Phone .......................................................... 266
Camera, Trailer Surround View ................................... 196 Climate Control ............................................................... 56 Diagnostic System, Onboard ....................................... 123
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 444 Automatic................................................................... 56 Diesel Exhaust Brake ................................................... 139
Caps, Filler Manual ....................................................................... 59 Diesel Fuel .................................................................... 442
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 377 Cold Weather Operation...............................................128 Diesel Fuel Requirements ........................................... 442
Power Steering........................................................ 173 Compact Spare Tire ......................................................426 Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .................................. 390
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 396 Connected Services..........................272, 273, 275, 284 Differential, Limited Slip .............................................. 166
Car Washes .................................................................. 434 Contract, Service ..........................................................451 Dimmer Controls ............................................................ 54
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......................................... 348 Controls .........................................................................253 Dipsticks
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................396 Power Steering ........................................................ 173
457
Disabled Vehicle Towing.............................................. 366 Emergency, In Case Of Exhaust Brake .............................................................. 139
Disc Drive...................................................................... 261 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck...................................365 Exhaust Gas Cautions .................................................. 348
Disconnecting............................................................... 266 Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................349 Exhaust System ......................................... 348, 393, 400
Disposal Jump Starting...........................................................361 Exterior Lighting.............................................................. 49
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................................... 396 Emission Control System Maintenance ......................124 Exterior Lights........................................................ 49, 348
Disturb .......................................................................... 269 Engine......................................................... 377, 378, 379
Door Ajar ....................................................................... 116 Air Cleaner ...............................................................382 F
Door Ajar Light.............................................................. 116 Block Heater .................................................. 130, 137 Family Alerts ................................................................. 283
Door Locks Break-In Recommendations...................................137 FAQ ................................................................................ 284
Automatic ...................................................................28 Compartment................................................. 378, 379 Features........................................................................ 275
Doors................................................................................25 Compartment Identification....................................377 Filters
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ......................... 387 Coolant (Antifreeze).................................................446 Air Cleaner ............................................................... 382
Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 259 Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................348 Air Conditioning ................................................ 62, 384
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................32 Fails To Start............................................................128 Engine Fuel.............................................................. 387
Driving Flooded, Starting .....................................................128 Engine Oil........................................................382, 446
Off-Pavement .......................................................... 158 Fuel Requirements........................................ 440, 444 Engine Oil Disposal ................................................. 382
Off-Road .................................................................. 158 Identification.................................................. 378, 379 Flashers
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Idling.........................................................................134 Turn Signals.............................................52, 122, 348
Shallow Standing Water.................................... 223 Jump Starting...........................................................361 Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 50
Dual Rear Wheels ............................................... 431, 438 Oil .......................................................... 381, 444, 446 Flat Tire Stowage.......................................................... 358
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................377 Fluid Capacities ............................................................ 444
E Oil Filter....................................................................382 Fluid Leaks.................................................................... 348
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 296 Oil Reset...................................................................107 Fluid Level Checks
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 295 Oil Selection................................................... 381, 444 Brake........................................................................ 397
Electronic Roll Mitigation .............................. 297, 301 Oil Synthetic.............................................................382 Power Steering ........................................................ 173
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................69 Overheating .............................................................364 Fluid, Brake................................................................... 448
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...........................143, 146 Runaway ..................................................................199 Fog Lights............................................................... 52, 413
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 297 Starting.....................................................................125 Fold Flat Load Floor........................................................ 66
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light................... 116 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 328, 368 Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 32
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case.................. 148, 151 Entry System, Illuminated .............................................. 55 Forward Collision Warning ........................................... 306
Emergency Braking .............................................138, 308 Ethanol ..........................................................................441 Four Wheel Drive .......................................................... 148
11
458
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ............................................ 349 Getting Started .............................................................273 Hood Prop ....................................................................... 75
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................................... 365 Glass Cleaning ..............................................................437 Hood Release ................................................................. 75
Front And Rear ParkSense System............................. 183 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................................205 Hub Caps ...................................................................... 360
Front Axle (Differential)................................................ 399 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating........................................204
Fuel ...................................................................... 440, 442 Guide I
Adding.............................................................200, 201 Body Builders.............................................................10 Idle-Up Feature ............................................................. 135
Additives.................................................................. 440 GVWR.............................................................................203 Ignition ............................................................................ 20
Clean Air .................................................................. 440 Switch ........................................................................ 20
Diesel....................................................................... 442 H Illuminated Entry ............................................................ 55
Ethanol .................................................................... 441 Hazard Inside Rearview Mirror .......................................... 38, 349
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)................................................ 200 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Instrument Cluster ............... 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 104
Filter......................................................................... 387 Shallow Standing Water ....................................223 Display ..................................................................... 104
Gasoline .................................................................. 440 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................................349 Engine Oil Reset...................................................... 107
Light......................................................................... 118 Head Restraints .............................................................. 36 Instrument Cluster Display
Materials Added...................................................... 440 Head Rests...................................................................... 36 Driver Assist............................................................. 107
Methanol ................................................................. 441 Headlights .....................................................................411 Fuel Economy.......................................................... 109
Octane Rating ................................................ 440, 446 Automatic High Beam ............................................... 50 Off Road................................................................... 108
Requirements .......................................440, 442, 444 Cleaning ...................................................................434 Speedometer........................................................... 107
Specifications.......................................................... 442 High Beam ................................................................. 50 Trip ........................................................................... 109
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 444 Lights On Reminder................................................... 51 Vehicle Info.............................................................. 108
Fueling .......................................................................... 201 Passing....................................................................... 50 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................................. 436
Fuses ............................................................................ 403 Switch......................................................................... 49 Integrated Trailer Brake Control.................................. 213
Heated Mirrors................................................................ 45 Interior Appearance Care............................................. 435
G Heated Seats .................................................................. 34 Interior Lights.................................................................. 53
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................................45 Heater, Engine Block ....................................................137 Intervention Regeneration Strategy ...................111, 390
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................. 200 Hill Descent Control......................................................299 Introduction .................................................................. 272
Gasoline, Clean Air....................................................... 440 Hill Descent Control Indicator......................................299 Inverter Outlet (115V) .................................................... 70
Gasoline, Reformulated............................................... 440 Hill Start Assist..............................................................300 iPod/USB/MP3 Control.................................................. 68
Gauges Hitches
Voltage..................................................................... 133 Trailer Towing ..........................................................208 J
Gear Ranges................................................................. 144 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................................. 45 Jack Location ................................................................ 352
Gear Selector Override ................................................ 362 Jacking And Tire Changing b .................................... 352
Jump Starting ............................................................... 361
459
K Cruise ............................................................. 122, 123 Limited-Slip Differential ......................................166, 400

Key Fob Daytime Running....................................................... 50 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode................................... 114
Panic Alarm ................................................................18 ECO...........................................................................122 Load Shed Battery Saver On ....................................... 114
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................19 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator..........116 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction......................... 114
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........18 Exterior ..............................................................49, 348 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ......................... 114
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............19 Fog.................................................................. 122, 413 Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 203
Keyless Enter 'n Go™................................... 26, 125, 129 Four Wheel Drive Indicator .....................................155 Tires ......................................................................... 420
Passive Entry..............................................................26 Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................349 Locks
Keys .................................................................................17 Headlights........................................................... 49, 50 Automatic Door ......................................................... 28
High Beam ................................................................. 50 Child Protection......................................................... 28
Hill Descent Control Indicator.................................299 Power Door ................................................................ 26
L
Illuminated Entry ....................................................... 55 Low Tire Pressure System............................................ 309
Lane Change And Turn Signals ......................................52
Interior........................................................................ 53 Lubrication, Body.......................................................... 391
Lane Change Assist ........................................................52
LaneSense ...................................118, 119, 122, 123 Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 438
LaneSense.................................................................... 187
Lights On Reminder................................................... 51
Latches ......................................................................... 348
Low Fuel...................................................................118 M
Hood ...........................................................................75
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....................118 Maintenance................................................................... 75
Lead Free Gasoline...................................................... 440
NEUTRAL ..................................................................121 Maintenance Free Battery ........................................... 380
Leaks, Fluid .................................................................. 348
Park ..........................................................................122 Maintenance Plan ........................................................ 373
Life Of Tires .................................................................. 424
Passing....................................................................... 50 Maintenance Schedule.......................................369, 373
Light Bulbs........................................................... 348, 410
Seat Belt Reminder .................................................117 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ......118, 124
Lights ............................................................................ 348
Security Alarm..........................................................117 Manage My Account..................................................... 284
Air Bag ...................................................115, 323, 346
Service .....................................................................410 Manual
Automatic High Beam................................................50
Side Marker .............................................................416 Park Release ........................................................... 363
Brake Assist Warning ............................................. 298
Snowplow.................................................................121 Service ..................................................................... 453
Brake Warning ........................................................ 115
Traction Control .......................................................298 Media Hub ...................................................................... 68
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 410
Trailer Hitch ............................................................... 52 Media Mode.................................................................. 261
Cab Top Clearance ................................................. 415
Transfer Case ..........................................................155 Memory Seat .................................................................. 31
Cargo ................................................................ 52, 121
Turn Signals ..........................52, 122, 348, 411, 414 Memory Settings ............................................................ 31
Center Mounted Stop ............................................. 414
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..............116 Methanol....................................................................... 441
Courtesy/Reading......................................................53
11
460
Midline instrument Cluster — Gas Engine b ..............93 Oil Filter, Selection........................................................382 Passive Entry .................................................................. 26
Mirror, Digital Rearview ..................................................39 Oil Life Reset b ..........................................................107 Pedals, Adjustable.......................................................... 38
Mirror, Digital Trailer Camera.........................................39 Oil Pressure Light..........................................................117 Pedestrian Warning System ........................................ 308
Mirrors .............................................................................38 Oil Reset ........................................................................107 Pets ............................................................................... 346
Electric Powered ........................................................42 Oil, Engine ........................................................... 381, 446 Phone Mode ................................................................. 263
Heated........................................................................45 Capacity ...................................................................444 Pickup Box ...................................................................... 79
Memory.......................................................................31 Dipstick ....................................................................380 Pinch Protection ............................................................. 75
Outside .......................................................................41 Disposal ...................................................................382 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 420
Rearview........................................................... 38, 349 Filter ............................................................... 382, 446 Power
Trailer Towing.............................................................41 Filter Disposal..........................................................382 Distribution Center (Fuses) .................................... 403
Mobile App.................................................................... 273 Identification Logo...................................................381 Door Locks................................................................. 26
Modifications/Alterations Materials Added To .................................................382 Folding Mirrors .......................................................... 42
Vehicle ........................................................................12 Pressure Warning Light...........................................117 Mirrors ....................................................................... 42
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 309 Recommendation.......................................... 381, 444 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)...................... 69, 70
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 452 Synthetic ..................................................................382 Outside Mirror Lights ................................................ 44
MP3 Control ....................................................................68 Viscosity ...................................................................444 Seats.......................................................................... 33
Multi-Function Control Lever ..........................................49 Onboard Diagnostic System.........................................123 Side Steps ................................................................. 26
Operating Precautions..................................................123 Sliding Rear Window ................................................. 74
N Operator Manual Steering ............................................................ 42, 173
New Vehicle Break-In Period ....................................... 137 Owner's Manual.......................................................453 Sunroof ...................................................................... 74
Noise Control Outside Rearview Mirrors............................................... 41 Windows .................................................................... 72
Maintenance ........................................................... 400 Overdrive .......................................................................147 Power Seats
Tampering Prohibited ............................................. 401 Overdrive OFF Switch ...................................................147 Down .......................................................................... 33
Noise Emission Warranty ...................................400, 401 Overheating, Engine .....................................................364 Forward...................................................................... 33
Rearward ................................................................... 33
P Recline ....................................................................... 34
O Tilt .............................................................................. 33
Occupant Restraints .................................................... 315 Paint Care......................................................................433
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To Up............................................................................... 33
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................................... 440 Power Steering Fluid .................................................... 448
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road)........................ 158, 224 A Mobile Phone b ......................................................265
Panic Alarm .....................................................................18 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................................ 321
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement)........................ 158, 224 Presets .......................................................................... 259
Oil Filter, Change.......................................................... 382 Parking Brake ...............................................................138
ParkSense System, Rear..............................................183
461
Pretensioners Release, Hood................................................................. 75 Saved Radio Stations................................................... 259

Seat Belts................................................................ 322 Release, Tailgate ............................................................ 76 Schedule, Maintenance............................................... 369
Profile Settings ............................................................. 228 Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................316 Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................... 117
Programmable Features.............................................. 226 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock................ 278, 284 Seat Belts.............................................................316, 346
Remote Features, Horn And Lights .............................279 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................ 319
R Remote Features, Starting................................. 278, 286 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 319
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 423 Remote Keyless Entry Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 319
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)................ 394, 396 Panic Alarm................................................................ 18 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................ 322
Radio Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 19 Child Restraints....................................................... 330
Presets..................................................................... 259 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................253 Energy Management Feature................................. 322
Settings ................................................................... 226 Remote Start (Diesel) ..................................................... 24 Extender................................................................... 321
Radio Controls.............................................................. 253 Remote Start (Gasoline)................................................. 22 Front Seat .......................................................316, 318
Radio Mode .................................................................. 253 Remote Starting Inspection................................................................ 346
Radio Operation .................................................. 253, 288 Exit Remote Start Mode............................................22 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................. 318
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 253 Replacement Bulbs ......................................................410 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................ 319
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................56 Replacement Tires........................................................424 Operating Instructions ............................................ 318
RamBox Cargo Storage...................................................82 Reporting Safety Defects .............................................452 Pregnant Women .................................................... 321
Ramp Travel Index ....................................................... 159 Restraints, Child ...........................................................330 Pretensioners .......................................................... 322
Rear Axle (Differential)........................................ 399, 400 Restraints, Head .............................................................36 Reminder ................................................................. 316
Rear Camera ................................................................ 191 Roadside Assistance .......................................... 279, 285 Seat Belt Extender .................................................. 321
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ..........................................81 Rotation, Tires...............................................................430 Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 322
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 304 Seat Belt Reminder................................................. 316
Rear ParkSense System .............................................. 183 S Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 319
Rear Seat Reminder Alert............................................ 296 Safety.............................................................................252 Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 436
Rear Window, Sliding......................................................74 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................................346 Seats ........................................................................ 32, 33
Recreational Towing .................................................... 219 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................347 Adjustment ......................................................... 32, 33
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................. 221 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................452 Easy Entry .................................................................. 34
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)............. 222 Safety Features.............................................................252 Folding Floor.............................................................. 66
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 440 Safety Information, Tire................................................416 Head Restraints ........................................................ 36
Refrigerant.................................................................... 384 Safety Tips.....................................................................346 Memory...................................................................... 31
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 273 Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................348 Power ......................................................................... 33
Rear Folding .............................................................. 32
Satellite Radio...............................................................255
Tilting ......................................................................... 32 11
462
Security Alarm ....................................................... 24, 117 Speed Control Surround View Camera ................................................ 191
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 446 Accel/Decel..............................................................175 Sway Control, Trailer .................................................... 301
Send & Go ........................................................... 280, 285 Cancel ......................................................................175 Synthetic Engine Oil ..................................................... 382
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................20 Resume ....................................................................175
Service Assistance ....................................................... 449 Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......................... 174, 175 T
Service Contract........................................................... 451 Stabilizer/Sway Bar System.........................................157 Tailgate Removal............................................................ 76
Service Manuals........................................................... 453 Starting................................................................ 125, 128 Tailgate, Electronic Lowering......................................... 76
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 259 Automatic Transmission ............................... 125, 129 Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 29
Shift Lever Override ..................................................... 362 Button......................................................................... 20 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 61
Shifting.......................................................................... 140 Cold Weather ...........................................................128 Tilt
Automatic Transmission................................ 141, 144 Engine Block Heater................................................130 Down .......................................................................... 33
Transfer Case.......................................................... 154 Engine Fails To Start ...............................................128 Up............................................................................... 33
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Starting And Operating .................................................125 Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 29
Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................................. 221 Starting Procedures............................................ 125, 128 Tip Start................................................................125, 129
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines)..........................128 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 420
Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................................. 222 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) .............................125 Tire Markings ................................................................ 416
Side Steps, Power ...........................................................26 Steering Tire Safety Information ................................................ 416
Signals, Turn................................................. 52, 122, 348 Power .......................................................................173 Tires..........................................347, 421, 425, 426, 432
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 255 Tilt Column................................................................. 29 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................................. 424
Favorites.................................................................. 258 Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 29 Air Pressure ............................................................. 421
Replay...................................................................... 257 Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 29 Chains ...................................................................... 427
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................253 Compact Spare........................................................ 426
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 258 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................253 Dual.................................................................431, 438
Favorites.................................................................. 258 Steps, Power Side........................................................... 26 General Information............................. 421, 425, 426
Replay...................................................................... 257 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................................. 282, 286 High Speed .............................................................. 423
Sliding Rear Window, Power...........................................74 Storage ............................................................................ 62 Inflation Pressure.................................................... 422
Smart Watch................................................................. 284 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .............................. 63 Life Of Tires ............................................................. 424
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 427 Storage, Vehicle.....................................................62, 433 Load Capacity.......................................................... 420
Snow Plow .................................................................... 217 Store Radio Presets......................................................259 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............119, 309
Snow Tires .................................................................... 425 Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................433 Quality Grading........................................................ 432
SOS Call ............................................................... 275, 284 Sun Roof................................................................... 74, 75 Radial....................................................................... 423
Spare Tires .................................................425, 426, 427 Sunglasses Storage........................................................ 65 Replacement ........................................................... 424
Sunshade Operation....................................................... 75
463
Rotation ................................................................... 430 Trailer Towing Guide.....................................................208 Help Command ....................................................... 265
Safety.............................................................. 416, 421 Trailer Weight................................................................208 Join Calls.................................................................. 270
Sizes ........................................................................ 417 Transfer Case................................................................400 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 267
Snow Tires............................................................... 425 Electronically Shifted..................................... 148, 151 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is
Spare Tires ............................................425, 426, 427 Fluid..........................................................................448 In Progress ......................................................... 269
Spinning .................................................................. 423 Transmission.................................................................141 Managing Your Favorites........................................ 267
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 213 Automatic.............................................. 141, 144, 397 Natural Speech ....................................................... 264
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 424 Fluid..........................................................................448 Operation................................................................. 264
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 438 Maintenance............................................................397 Overview .................................................................. 263
To Open Hood..................................................................75 Shifting.....................................................................140 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 265
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 208 Transporting Pets .........................................................346 Phonebook Download............................................. 267
Tonneau Cover ...................................................... 86, 434 Tread Wear Indicators ..................................................424 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................ 269
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................................. 434 Turn Signals ........................................ 52, 122, 411, 414 Power-Up.................................................................. 272
Torque Converter Clutch.............................................. 147 Recent Calls ............................................................ 268
Towing.................................................................. 204, 366 U Redial....................................................................... 270
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 366 Uconnect To Remove A Favorite ............................................. 267
Guide ....................................................................... 208 Phone Call Features ................................................268 Toggling Between Calls........................................... 269
Recreational............................................................ 219 Things You Should Know About Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 268
Weight...................................................................... 208 Your Uconnect Phone ........................................270 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.............. 270
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 219 Uconnect Phone ................................................. 264, 265 Voice Command ...................................................... 270
Traction......................................................................... 223 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Uconnect Settings ........................................................ 226
Traction Control............................................................ 301 Call Currently In Progress ..................................269 Customer Programmable Features ......................... 26
Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................................. 209 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Passive Entry Programming ..................................... 26
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 301 No Call Currently In Progress.............................268 Uconnect System.......................................................... 250
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 204 Bluetooth Communication Link..............................272 Uconnect Voice Command ............................................ 30
Hitches .................................................................... 208 Call Continuation .....................................................270 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 432
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 212 Call Controls.............................................................268 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
Mirrors ........................................................................41 Call Termination ......................................................270 If Equipped b ............................................................... 45
Tips .......................................................................... 217 Cancel Command ....................................................265 Unleaded Gasoline....................................................... 440
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 208 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................................. 319
Wiring....................................................................... 215 Audio Device After Pairing .................................266 USB.................................................................................. 68
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area......................................... 81
11
464
V W Wind Buffeting................................................................ 74
Vehicle Finder...................................................... 280, 285 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) .....118 Window Fogging ............................................................. 62
Vehicle Health Alert ..................................................... 282 Warranty Information ...................................................452 Windows.......................................................................... 72
Vehicle Health Report .................................................. 282 Washers, Windshield....................................................380 Power ......................................................................... 72
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 438 Washing Vehicle ...........................................................434 Rear Sliding ............................................................... 74
Vehicle Loading................................................... 203, 420 Water Reset Auto-Up............................................................ 73
Vehicle Maintenance ................................................... 381 Driving Through .......................................................223 Windshield Defroster ................................................... 346
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations..................................12 Water Separator Windshield Washers ............................................. 55, 380
Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 283 Diesel Fuel ...............................................................387 Fluid ......................................................................... 380
Vehicle Settings............................................................ 226 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................427 Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 391
Vehicle Storage ..................................................... 62, 433 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ..........................................427 Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 55
Ventilated Seats..............................................................35 Wheel Covers ................................................................360 Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 391
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................................30 Wi-Fi ...............................................................................281 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 56
Voltmeter ...................................................................... 133 Winch.............................................................................166 Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 72
Accessories..............................................................167
Operation .................................................................168
Rigging Techniques .................................................172
Usage .......................................................................166
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit mopar.com/om (USA),
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a
that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing 2023 RAM 2500/3500
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
2023 RAM 2500/3500

extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go OWNER’S MANUAL
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
USA CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. SECOND EDITION V1
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC

Owner'S Manual: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner'S Manual: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner'S Manual: Download The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing 2023

2023 RAM 2500/3500

2023 RAM 2500/3500

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................92 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 125 4

5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 225 5

6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 295 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS ................................................................................25 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —

EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................................49 CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................... 56 TAILGATE ............................................................................. 76

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Windshield Wiper Blades..........................................391

INTERIORS ....................................................................... 435 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Mexico........................................................................451

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Ú page 116

WARNING! Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Oil Pressure Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

LaneSense Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Low Coolant Level Warning Light

Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)

4WD Lock Indicator Light TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

4WD Low Indicator Light Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light

4WD High Indicator Light Wait To Start Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Blue Indicator Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

The push button ignition can be placed in the following

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION  Side mirrors PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE

 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon- NOTE:

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE